Lincoln Electric Welding System SVM158 A User Manual

RETURN TO MAIN INDEX  
SVM158-A  
April, 2002  
INVERTEC V350-PRO  
For use with machine code numbers 10873, 10874, 10876  
!
WA  
!
RNING  
W
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet con  
ARNING  
o
re  
elit, ed  
lit,  
laoreet  
d
m
iam non  
ip  
la  
d
e
d
olore  
s
u
o
m
Lorem  
re  
i
r
p
e
sum dodlor sit am  
et consectetuer adipiscing  
d
lo  
o
e
ia  
t
m
o
elit  
li  
m
d
n
r
ip  
o
lo  
o
s
it  
t,,  
e
e
n
lao  
o
s
n
re  
umm  
a
d diam  
lolodr  
m
u
on  
m
magna  
a
m
liquam erm  
e
e t  
m
y
Lorem iprsee  
re  
u
e
m
t
t
d
do  
o
r
ia  
s
d
a
g
n
nibh  
o
e
o
c
o
lo  
o
re mag umm  
a
n
ib  
e
m
lit, ed diamipnon lo  
d
o
n
r
s
n
sectetuer adipiscing  
a
h
n
it  
liq  
e
e
uismod t  
c
is  
m
u
,
a
laoreet  
o
d
e
olore mag  
s
na al  
m
m
u
te  
tu  
d
d
u
m
m
nibh eutismod tin  
a
m
y
na aliqua  
e
m
re  
Lorem ipsum  
a
olor sit amet consloectetu  
ecidunt  
rat  
o
t
e
r
ia  
m
d
g
c
e
o
nm  
d
a
d
d
t
a
ib  
o
tiinnc  
o
d
n
r
a
h
n
t
ip  
idunt ut  
is  
re  
lit, ed dia  
o
o
s
s
e
c
liq  
e
e
m
lo  
n
it  
a
u
c
c
in  
re  
umm  
m
y
ame  
m
u
te  
u
ip  
m
a
is  
n
,
s
m
m
m
monosdectertuer ad  
tu  
t
g
laoreet  
o
e
t
d
e
olore  
d
m
e
e
u
t
u
a
nibh eutis  
n
h
c
o
r
m
g
c
rat  
d
re  
d
d
n
o
tin  
a
d
u
ia  
a
ib  
liquam er  
n
t
m non  
n
o
n
o
lo  
a
s
c
id  
ip  
is  
c
!
Lorem ipsum  
re  
ip  
d
r
q
e
e
c
o
o
s
it  
u
u
te  
u
in  
g
lo  
a
is  
n
elit, ed  
d
m
iam non  
re  
umm  
a
m
m
tu  
e
r
t
lit  
,
m
m
m
nibh eutis  
agna aliquam  
e
o
t
m
y
e
rat  
d
a
d
ip  
A
l
e
d
s
c
m
o
tin  
aor  
Lorem  
re  
u
g
met consectetue  
n
t
ncidunt ut  
id  
o
ipsum dolor sit  
ia  
a
m
n
r
ad  
a
c
o
reet dolodre magna aliquam er  
ddol  
o
a
ib  
n
iscing  
e
m
h
s
u
c
in  
!
TTENTION  
el  
lit  
laoreet  
m
t
lor sit  
s
liq  
e
e
c
n
i
, ed diam non  
olore ma  
d
o
n
r
u
u
is  
te  
t
u
t
g
p
lo  
o
a
tu  
er adipi  
A
VISO DE  
PRECA  
d
e
s
g
re  
n
it  
m
m
od ti  
t
u
umm  
m
m
am  
o
d
m
m
eer  
nibh eutismod tincidunt tut  
d
r
incidunt utip  
a
d
re  
d
m
rat  
ia  
d
a
et consectet  
c
e
t
m
o
y
lo  
g
n
n
c
isscing  
in  
d
n
r
o
id  
o
o
a
ib  
n
u
n
t
c
lo  
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amret  
n
s
it  
a
h
s
liq  
e
e
g
o
umm  
m
m
a
u
c
te  
tuer  
u
t
re  
m
m
t
ibh eui  
u
is  
el  
liitt,  
m
a
e
a
m
m
y
ni  
n
c
e
Lorem ip  
re  
elit, ed  
lit  
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consipesctetuer adipiscingngaa  
,
d
a
o
e
rat  
d
r
adipiscing  
d
o
o
laoreet  
e
o
d
lore magna aliquam er  
u
diam no  
n
tin  
c
id  
a h  
liquam er  
s
ismod tintecidunt ut  
t
ip  
d
m
iam non  
ip  
laoreet dolore magna aliquam er  
sum dolo  
o
d
m
n
e
e
elit, ed diam non  
lit  
re  
d
c
is  
c
ia  
m
d
u
u
,
laoree,t doloreipmagna aliquameero  
d
consectet  
n
er ad numm  
r
ipiscing  
e
o
e
t
g
o
o
a
tu  
u
in  
e
d
t
lo  
m
m
n
u
m
ed diam non  
m
orelormssuaitgan  
d
o
l
o
o
s
d
r
u
Lorem  
re  
i
r
p
e
s
d
ia  
Loremor  
i
e
p
estudmold  
o
ma  
ealot  
u
re  
it  
rat  
tin  
a
d
t
o
e
d
o
a
t
ipis  
is  
t
d
m
lo  
r sit amet  
m
m
nibh eutiscmonosecte  
c
eli  
m
t, ed diam  
n
o
am er  
m
m
y
id  
o
re  
ma adloiqlo  
elit, ed diam non  
it  
laoree,t doloreipmagna aliquam er  
a
e
lit  
ip  
olore magu  
lo  
s
it  
g
u
n
cing  
in  
g
laoreet  
o
,
d
e
s
n
m
u
r
n
umm  
m
n
n
o
t
m
a
m
a
ib  
n
u
d
m
ed diamsunmondolo  
oreet do  
r
a
h
s
t
Lorem iprseum dolodr sit amet consectet  
a
e
liq  
e
e
o
e
ia  
m
d
g
y
nibh eutis  
UCION  
consectetuer adipisci  
r
s
u
c
o
u
m
m
i
t
u
is  
te  
tuer adipiscing  
re  
t
d
lo  
n
a
n
ib  
sit amet conse  
o
n
amet consecte  
nibh euismod tincidunteurat  
a
m
m
elit  
lit  
, ed dia  
Lolaroermeeipsu dolor  
m
o
non  
n
r
e
ip  
lo  
re  
o
s
it  
a
liq  
h
e
s
e
o
r
tincidunt  
id  
c
te  
d
a
s
umm  
m
a
u
u
y
t
t
u
d
t
e
m
d
s
uit amet co  
m
m
a
is  
m
cidunt o  
rat  
lore  
m
r
umm  
c
ip  
o
rere  
me  
lit, ed diamipt ndonlor m non  
o
d
m
m
a
e
m
tu  
e
Safety Depends on You  
sit amet  
is  
c
in  
el  
ia  
d
g
y
nibh eutis  
c
mod tin  
o
n
e
u
t
d
t
a
u
d
u
o
lo  
n
a
n
ib  
li  
n
d
tiincidunt  
t
ip  
is  
quam  
nibh euismod tincisidunt ut  
t
g
s
o
n
r
a
h
s
t
n
c
lao  
o
e
lo  
reet dolodre magna adliqmuam er  
o
s
limquam ear  
liq  
e
agna  
a
u
t
d
u
n
it  
e
u
is  
ctetuer adipisci id  
te  
m
re magna  
o
u
m
u
u
c
inng  
y
a
m
a
n
mod  
etuer adip  
tu  
e
ia  
m
y
m
e
m
m
tu  
t
g
c
euismod at  
e
onsect  
t
m
e
e
u
t
ib  
e
d
lo  
a
g
nibh  
n
t
e
o
d
r
r
Lorem  
o
n
r
n
c
ra  
a
li  
h
t
r
o
lo  
o
s
ib  
o
t
tin  
c
d
quam er  
t
ad  
re  
elit, ed  
lit  
re  
n
ita  
aa  
h
n
ip  
is  
in  
c
d
m
iam non  
umm  
m
m
s
m
m
li  
q
t
e
uis  
is  
m
e
c
id  
u
c
inng  
ip  
ipsum dolor  
s
m
e
u
a
m
te  
tuer  
id  
,
a
n
is  
laoreet  
a
re  
orem ipsu  
d
e
olore magna aliquam er  
u
g
y
n
c
t
g
unt  
d
n
n
u
c
o
a
ibh  
o
ns  
s
e
od  
d
t
e
r
t
in  
d
d
a
adipiscing  
d
at  
u
t
L
e
ia  
h
rat  
c
tetuer adipiscing  
tinc  
c
a
tin  
g
t
m
o
liq  
euismode  
t
i
t
te  
re  
d
lo  
u
u
ip  
idunt ut  
is  
n
r
is  
c
elit  
lit  
m
o
lo  
re  
gna aliquam  
o
sit amet  
it  
m
a
m
m
tu  
c
in  
id  
i
lodreiama  
p
n
o
e
u
n
t
is  
,
s
umm  
m
y
a
e
r
g
un  
laoreet  
o
d
e
o
d
u
m
er  
a
g
m
rat  
t
d
a
u
t
c
d
tin  
d
ip  
idunt ut  
is  
in  
g
d
m dolor sit  
a
e
nci  
t
re  
nibh eutiscmo  
o
c
ut  
e
t
ia  
d
o
n
n
m non  
n
lo  
a
ib  
u
c
in  
d
r
a
h
nsec  
s
n
o
o
liq  
e
c
tetuer  
tu  
t
u
t
g
lo  
n
s
it  
e
re  
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetueLroaredmipiscindgomlor  
ipsum  
umm  
sit am  
m
a
u
u
is  
m
a
a
m
c
a
m
et consecetetuer adipeiscing od  
met  
e
r
o
a
g
elit, ed diam non  
li  
laoreet,t dolore magna aliquam er  
re  
elit, ed  
lit,  
laoreet  
y
n
n
t
c
rat  
d
d
m
iam non  
ip  
n
onsectetue  
t
s
r
adipistcinin  
c
gidunt udtipiscing  
a
ib  
n
n
c
id  
u
ip  
is  
a
h euis  
e
la  
ed diam non  
d
e
olor  
s
liq  
e
Lola  
d
u
si  
u
u
c
te  
n
c
in  
Loremor  
estum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing ddolor  
i
e
p
o
o
m
a
is  
mo  
t
g
remreipsum  
elit, ed diam non  
m
tu  
u
t
ia  
d
o
lo  
eli  
lit,  
t,  
laoreet  
m
e
ip do  
t
m
e
o
e
r
rat  
d
ti  
a
d
ut  
ip  
d
n
r
it  
d
e
o
d
lore magnaloaliquamo er  
s
r
s
numm it  
t
inncidunt  
o
nlaoraeli  
sum do  
m
qu  
a
a
g
m
na  
e
a
r
d
u
c
laoree,t doloreipmag  
o
m
a
id  
is  
c
in  
ed  
d
r
di  
iaam  
e mag  
m
m
oree  
e
d
m
lo  
r
m
nibh eutismod tincidunt ut  
u
n
e
m
o
e
umm  
t
t
a
y
na aliqua er  
ib  
t
u
t
g
g
s
n
co  
ia  
dolore magna  
m non  
amet  
nibh euismod trienmcidunt  
d
o
no  
m
t
lo  
o
a
n
s
te  
er adipis  
numumt  
liq  
e
ctetu  
ec  
a
i
t
a
m
a
e
h
lo  
y
m
m
r
s
c
a
m
e
nibh eutiscma  
n
u
uis  
ib  
onsecte  
g
y
o
o
m
nosd  
n
e
t
m
t
c
uing  
e
u
m
m
i
t
liq  
met uam  
nibh euismod tincisidunt ut  
h
eu  
n
o
a
a
ib  
e
d
r
a
h
s
ra  
t
ti  
a
d
liq  
u
e
e
n
c
cid  
ip  
is  
y
u
is  
te  
mod tu  
etuer  
a
m
m
tu  
r
incidunt  
u
ci  
n
c
e
ib  
onsect  
r
at  
er ad  
ncidunt  
e
o
e
n
t
g
rat  
d
a
ut  
li  
h
ti  
d
quam  
e
er  
ti  
t
u
ip  
c
is  
u
id  
is  
ip  
u
ci  
ng  
mod  
is  
nt  
c
u
in  
g
t
at  
u
t
t
ti  
a
ncidunt  
d
ip  
iscing  
u
t
Lincoln arc welding and cutting  
equipment is designed and built  
with safety in mind. However,  
your overall safety can be  
A AM  
PS  
increased by proper installation  
. . . and thoughtful operation on  
your part. DO NOT INSTALL,  
OPERATE OR REPAIR THIS  
EQUIPMENT WITHOUT READ-  
ING THIS MANUAL AND THE  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CON-  
TAINED THROUGHOUT. And,  
most importantly, think before  
you act and be careful.  
V VOL  
TS  
A
C
C-STICK 7018  
OUTPUT  
WELD  
CC-STICK 6010  
T
ERMINALS  
TIG GT  
A
W
-WIRE  
CV  
CV  
-FLUX CORED  
HO  
SELECT  
T
ST  
AR  
T
4
5
3
SELECT  
6
ARC CONTR  
2
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
7
1
OL  
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
+2  
R
E
M
O
-6  
9
10  
T
E
+4  
-8  
+6  
+8  
-10  
SOFT  
+10  
CRISP  
P
O
W
E
R
O
N
SERVICE MANUAL  
Copyright © 2002 Lincoln Global Inc.  
• World's Leader in Welding and Cutting Products •  
• Sales and Service through Subsidiaries and Distributors Worldwide •  
Cleveland, Ohio 44117-1199 U.S.A. TEL: 216.481.8100 FAX: 216.486.1751 WEB SITE: www.lincolnelectric.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ii  
ii  
SAFETY  
ARC RAYS can burn.  
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.  
3.a. The electrode and work (or ground) circuits  
are electrically “hot” when the welder is on.  
Do not touch these “hot” parts with your bare  
skin or wet clothing. Wear dry, hole-free  
gloves to insulate hands.  
4.a. Use a shield with the proper filter and cover  
plates to protect your eyes from sparks and  
the rays of the arc when welding or observing  
open arc welding. Headshield and filter lens  
should conform to ANSI Z87. I standards.  
4.b. Use suitable clothing made from durable flame-resistant  
material to protect your skin and that of your helpers from  
the arc rays.  
3.b. Insulate yourself from work and ground using dry insulation.  
Make certain the insulation is large enough to cover your full  
area of physical contact with work and ground.  
4.c. Protect other nearby personnel with suitable, non-flammable  
screening and/or warn them not to watch the arc nor expose  
themselves to the arc rays or to hot spatter or metal.  
In addition to the normal safety precautions, if welding  
must be performed under electrically hazardous  
conditions (in damp locations or while wearing wet  
clothing; on metal structures such as floors, gratings or  
scaffolds; when in cramped positions such as sitting,  
kneeling or lying, if there is a high risk of unavoidable or  
accidental contact with the workpiece or ground) use  
the following equipment:  
FUMES AND GASES  
can be dangerous.  
5.a. Welding may produce fumes and gases  
hazardous to health. Avoid breathing these  
• Semiautomatic DC Constant Voltage (Wire) Welder.  
• DC Manual (Stick) Welder.  
• AC Welder with Reduced Voltage Control.  
fumes and gases.When welding, keep  
your head out of the fume. Use enough  
ventilation and/or exhaust at the arc to keep  
3.c. In semiautomatic or automatic wire welding, the electrode,  
electrode reel, welding head, nozzle or semiautomatic  
welding gun are also electrically “hot”.  
fumes and gases away from the breathing zone. When  
welding with electrodes which require special  
ventilation such as stainless or hard facing (see  
instructions on container or MSDS) or on lead or  
cadmium plated steel and other metals or coatings  
which produce highly toxic fumes, keep exposure as  
low as possible and below Threshold Limit Values (TLV)  
using local exhaust or mechanical ventilation. In  
confined spaces or in some circumstances, outdoors, a  
respirator may be required. Additional precautions are  
also required when welding on galvanized steel.  
3.d. Always be sure the work cable makes a good electrical  
connection with the metal being welded. The connection  
should be as close as possible to the area being welded.  
3.e. Ground the work or metal to be welded to a good electrical  
(earth) ground.  
3.f. Maintain the electrode holder, work clamp, welding cable and  
welding machine in good, safe operating condition. Replace  
damaged insulation.  
5.b. Do not weld in locations near chlorinated hydrocarbon vapors  
coming from degreasing, cleaning or spraying operations.  
The heat and rays of the arc can react with solvent vapors to  
form phosgene, a highly toxic gas, and other irritating  
products.  
3.g. Never dip the electrode in water for cooling.  
3.h. Never simultaneously touch electrically “hot” parts of  
electrode holders connected to two welders because voltage  
between the two can be the total of the open circuit voltage  
of both welders.  
5.c. Shielding gases used for arc welding can displace air and  
cause injury or death. Always use enough ventilation,  
especially in confined areas, to insure breathing air is safe.  
3.i. When working above floor level, use a safety belt to protect  
yourself from a fall should you get a shock.  
5.d. Read and understand the manufacturer’s instructions for this  
equipment and the consumables to be used, including the  
material safety data sheet (MSDS) and follow your  
employer’s safety practices. MSDS forms are available from  
your welding distributor or from the manufacturer.  
3.j. Also see Items 6.c. and 8.  
5.e. Also see item 1.b.  
Mar ‘95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
iii  
SAFETY  
WELDING SPARKS can  
cause fire or explosion.  
CYLINDER may explode  
if damaged.  
6.a. Remove fire hazards from the welding area.  
If this is not possible, cover them to prevent  
7.a. Use only compressed gas cylinders  
containing the correct shielding gas for the  
the welding sparks from starting a fire.  
Remember that welding sparks and hot  
materials from welding can easily go through small cracks  
and openings to adjacent areas. Avoid welding near  
hydraulic lines. Have a fire extinguisher readily available.  
process used and properly operating  
regulators designed for the gas and  
pressure used. All hoses, fittings, etc. should be suitable for  
the application and maintained in good condition.  
7.b. Always keep cylinders in an upright position securely  
chained to an undercarriage or fixed support.  
6.b. Where compressed gases are to be used at the job site,  
special precautions should be used to prevent hazardous  
situations. Refer to “Safety in Welding and Cutting” (ANSI  
Standard Z49.1) and the operating information for the  
equipment being used.  
7.c. Cylinders should be located:  
Away from areas where they may be struck or subjected to  
physical damage.  
6.c. When not welding, make certain no part of the electrode  
circuit is touching the work or ground. Accidental contact can  
cause overheating and create a fire hazard.  
•A safe distance from arc welding or cutting operations and  
any other source of heat, sparks, or flame.  
7.d. Never allow the electrode, electrode holder or any other  
electrically “hot” parts to touch a cylinder.  
6.d. Do not heat, cut or weld tanks, drums or containers until the  
proper steps have been taken to insure that such procedures  
will not cause flammable or toxic vapors from substances  
inside. They can cause an explosion even though they have  
been “cleaned”. For information, purchase “Recommended  
Safe Practices for the Preparation for Welding and Cutting of  
Containers and Piping That Have Held Hazardous  
Substances”, AWS F4.1 from the American Welding Society  
(see address above).  
7.e. Keep your head and face away from the cylinder valve outlet  
when opening the cylinder valve.  
7.f. Valve protection caps should always be in place and hand  
tight except when the cylinder is in use or connected for  
use.  
7.g. Read and follow the instructions on compressed gas  
cylinders, associated equipment, and CGA publication P-l,  
“Precautions for Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in  
Cylinders,” available from the Compressed Gas Association  
1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.  
6.e. Vent hollow castings or containers before heating, cutting or  
welding. They may explode.  
6.f. Sparks and spatter are thrown from the welding arc. Wear oil  
free protective garments such as leather gloves, heavy shirt,  
cuffless trousers, high shoes and a cap over your hair. Wear  
ear plugs when welding out of position or in confined places.  
Always wear safety glasses with side shields when in a  
welding area.  
FOR ELECTRICALLY  
powered equipment.  
6.g. Connect the work cable to the work as close to the welding  
area as practical. Work cables connected to the building  
framework or other locations away from the welding area  
increase the possibility of the welding current passing  
through lifting chains, crane cables or other alternate circuits.  
This can create fire hazards or overheat lifting chains or  
cables until they fail.  
8.a. Turn off input power using the disconnect  
switch at the fuse box before working on  
the equipment.  
8.b. Install equipment in accordance with the U.S. National  
Electrical Code, all local codes and the manufacturer’s  
recommendations.  
6.h. Also see item 1.c.  
8.c. Ground the equipment in accordance with the U.S. National  
Electrical Code and the manufacturer’s recommendations.  
Mar ‘95  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
iv  
SAFETY  
6. Eloigner les matériaux inflammables ou les recouvrir afin de  
PRÉCAUTIONS DE SÛRETÉ  
prévenir tout risque d’incendie dû aux étincelles.  
Pour votre propre protection lire et observer toutes les instructions  
et les précautions de sûreté specifiques qui parraissent dans ce  
manuel aussi bien que les précautions de sûreté générales suiv-  
antes:  
7. Quand on ne soude pas, poser la pince à une endroit isolé de  
la masse. Un court-circuit accidental peut provoquer un  
échauffement et un risque d’incendie.  
8. S’assurer que la masse est connectée le plus prés possible de  
la zone de travail qu’il est pratique de le faire. Si on place la  
masse sur la charpente de la construction ou d’autres endroits  
éloignés de la zone de travail, on augmente le risque de voir  
passer le courant de soudage par les chaines de levage,  
câbles de grue, ou autres circuits. Cela peut provoquer des  
risques d’incendie ou d’echauffement des chaines et des  
câbles jusqu’à ce qu’ils se rompent.  
Sûreté Pour Soudage A L’Arc  
1. Protegez-vous contre la secousse électrique:  
a. Les circuits à l’électrode et à la piéce sont sous tension  
quand la machine à souder est en marche. Eviter toujours  
tout contact entre les parties sous tension et la peau nue  
ou les vétements mouillés. Porter des gants secs et sans  
trous pour isoler les mains.  
b. Faire trés attention de bien s’isoler de la masse quand on  
soude dans des endroits humides, ou sur un plancher met-  
allique ou des grilles metalliques, principalement dans  
les positions assis ou couché pour lesquelles une grande  
partie du corps peut être en contact avec la masse.  
c. Maintenir le porte-électrode, la pince de masse, le câble de  
soudage et la machine à souder en bon et sûr état defonc-  
tionnement.  
9. Assurer une ventilation suffisante dans la zone de soudage.  
Ceci est particuliérement important pour le soudage de tôles  
galvanisées plombées, ou cadmiées ou tout autre métal qui  
produit des fumeés toxiques.  
10. Ne pas souder en présence de vapeurs de chlore provenant  
d’opérations de dégraissage, nettoyage ou pistolage. La  
chaleur ou les rayons de l’arc peuvent réagir avec les vapeurs  
du solvant pour produire du phosgéne (gas fortement toxique)  
ou autres produits irritants.  
d.Ne jamais plonger le porte-électrode dans l’eau pour le  
refroidir.  
e. Ne jamais toucher simultanément les parties sous tension  
des porte-électrodes connectés à deux machines à souder  
parce que la tension entre les deux pinces peut être le total  
de la tension à vide des deux machines.  
11. Pour obtenir de plus amples renseignements sur la sûreté, voir  
le code “Code for safety in welding and cutting” CSA Standard  
W 117.2-1974.  
f. Si on utilise la machine à souder comme une source de  
courant pour soudage semi-automatique, ces precautions  
pour le porte-électrode s’applicuent aussi au pistolet de  
soudage.  
PRÉCAUTIONS DE SÛRETÉ POUR  
LES MACHINES À SOUDER À  
TRANSFORMATEUR ET À  
REDRESSEUR  
2. Dans le cas de travail au dessus du niveau du sol, se protéger  
contre les chutes dans le cas ou on recoit un choc. Ne jamais  
enrouler le câble-électrode autour de n’importe quelle partie du  
corps.  
3. Un coup d’arc peut être plus sévère qu’un coup de soliel, donc:  
a. Utiliser un bon masque avec un verre filtrant approprié ainsi  
qu’un verre blanc afin de se protéger les yeux du rayon-  
nement de l’arc et des projections quand on soude ou  
quand on regarde l’arc.  
1. Relier à la terre le chassis du poste conformement au code de  
l’électricité et aux recommendations du fabricant. Le dispositif  
de montage ou la piece à souder doit être branché à une  
bonne mise à la terre.  
b. Porter des vêtements convenables afin de protéger la peau  
de soudeur et des aides contre le rayonnement de l‘arc.  
c. Protéger l’autre personnel travaillant à proximité au  
soudage à l’aide d’écrans appropriés et non-inflammables.  
2. Autant que possible, I’installation et l’entretien du poste seront  
effectués par un électricien qualifié.  
3. Avant de faires des travaux à l’interieur de poste, la debranch-  
er à l’interrupteur à la boite de fusibles.  
4. Des gouttes de laitier en fusion sont émises de l’arc de  
soudage. Se protéger avec des vêtements de protection libres  
de l’huile, tels que les gants en cuir, chemise épaisse, pan-  
talons sans revers, et chaussures montantes.  
4. Garder tous les couvercles et dispositifs de sûreté à leur place.  
5. Toujours porter des lunettes de sécurité dans la zone de  
soudage. Utiliser des lunettes avec écrans lateraux dans les  
zones où l’on pique le laitier.  
Mar. ‘93  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
MASTER TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR ALL SECTIONS  
RETURN TO MAIN INDEX  
Page  
Safety.................................................................................................................................................i-iv  
Installation.............................................................................................................................Section A  
Operation...............................................................................................................................Section B  
Accessories...........................................................................................................................Section C  
Maintenance .........................................................................................................................Section D  
Theory of Operation .............................................................................................................Section E  
Troubleshooting and Repair.................................................................................................Section F  
How to Use Troubleshooting Guide............................................................................................F-2  
Troubleshooting Guide................................................................................................................F-4  
Test Procedures ........................................................................................................................F-15  
Replacement Procedures .........................................................................................................F-51  
Electrical Diagrams..............................................................................................................Section G  
Parts Manual....................................................................................................................P-401 Series  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SectionA-1  
Section A-1  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
- INSTALLATION SECTION -  
Installation  
Technical Specifications .............................................................................................................A-2  
Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................A-3  
Stacking......................................................................................................................................A-3  
Tilting ..........................................................................................................................................A-3  
Input Grounding Connections ....................................................................................................A-3  
Power Cord Connection.............................................................................................................A-3  
Connection of Wire Feeders................................................................................................A-3/A-4  
Cobramatic Connection Instructions..........................................................................................A-4  
Parallel Operation .......................................................................................................................A-5  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2  
A-2  
INSTALLATION  
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - INVERTEC V350-PRO  
INPUT AC VOLTAGE & DC OUTPUT  
Product Ordering Input AC  
Name Information Voltage  
Rated DC Output  
Amps/Volt  
Output  
Range  
continuous  
Weight  
with Cord  
Dimensions  
HxWxD  
Voltage  
Open  
Circuit  
/Duty Cycle  
(
)
K1728-5  
Construction  
Construction  
(81.0 lbs.)  
(36.7 kg.)  
200  
350A / 34V / 60%  
300A / 32V /100%  
14.8” x 13.3” x  
27.8”*  
(373 x 338 x  
706*)mm  
Invertec K1728-6 208-230/  
V350-  
PRO  
Factory  
380-400/  
415-460/  
575  
AMPS  
5-425  
Factory  
(81.0 lbs.)  
(36.7 kg.)  
60/50 Hz K1728-7  
80 VDC  
Advanced 1& 3 Phase  
Process  
60/50 Hz  
Advanced Process  
(81.5 lbs.)  
(37.0 kg.)  
* Overall Length Including Handle, 27.8” (706mm)  
V350-PRO INPUT CURRENT  
Recommemded Fuse Sizes Base On The U.S. National Electrical Code And Maximum Machine Outputs  
Input 50/60 Hz Output Recommended  
300Amps @ Fuse size  
Notes  
Voltage  
200  
Phases  
350Amps @  
34Volts(60%)  
Not  
Line Cord  
32Volts(100%)  
Not  
AWG  
Note 1  
1
---  
Recommended Recommended  
Note 2  
Note 2  
Note 1  
208  
230  
380  
1
1
1
76  
69  
Not  
94  
85  
Not  
125A  
125A  
---  
2
4
Recommended Recommended  
Not Not  
Recommended Recommended  
Note 1  
Note 2  
400  
1
---  
---  
415  
460  
575  
1
1
1
41  
36  
31  
64  
42  
37  
80A  
70A  
50A  
6
8
8
Note 2  
Note 2  
200  
208  
230  
380  
400  
415  
460  
575  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
41  
39  
36  
23  
22  
22  
19  
16  
50  
50  
42  
28  
27  
26  
23  
18  
80A  
80A  
70A  
50A  
50A  
50A  
50A  
35A  
8
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
Note 1. Not rated is indicated by 4-x’s in the box on the rating plate.  
Note 2. When operating on these inputs, the line cord should be changed to an input conductor of 6 AWG or larger.  
OUTPUT CABLES, CONNECTIONS AND LIMITATIONS  
Select The output cable size based upon the following chart.  
Cable sizes for Combined Length of Electrode and Work Cable (Copper) 75C rated:  
DUTY CYCLE  
100%  
CURRENT  
300  
LENGTH UP TO 200FT.(61m)  
200-250 FT. (61-76m)  
1/0  
1/0  
1/0  
2/0  
60%  
350  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-3  
A-3  
INSTALLATION  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
• Initial 200VAC - 415VAC and 575VAC operation will  
require an Input voltage panel setup.  
• Open the access panel on the rear of the machine.  
• For 200 or 230: Position the large switch to 200-  
230.  
WARNING  
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.  
For higher voltages: Position the large switch to  
380-575.  
• TURN THE INPUT POWER OFF AT  
THE DISCONNECT SWITCH BEFORE  
• Move the "A" lead to the appropriate terminal.  
ATTEMPTING TO CONNECT OR DIS-  
CONNECT INPUT POWER LINES, OUTPUT  
CABLES, OR CONTROL CABLES.  
POWER CORD CONNECTION  
A 10 ft. power cord is provided and wired into the  
machine. Follow the power cord connection instruc-  
tions.  
• Only qualified personnel should perform this  
installation.  
• Connect the green/yellow lead of the power  
cord to ground per U.S.National Electrical Code.  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
CAUTION  
Incorrect connection may result in equipment  
SELECT SUITABLE LOCATION  
damage.  
--------------------------------------------------------B-L-A-C--K----------  
The Invertec V350-PRO will operate in harsh environ-  
ments. Even so, it is important that simple preventative  
measures are followed in order to assure long life and  
reliable operation.  
GREEN  
RED  
WHITE OR BROWN  
!
W
!
A
W
A
R
Lorem  
NIN  
elit,  
e
m
i
p
d
l
a
o
r
e
e
t
d
e
d
d
i
sum  
sum  
R
N
L
o
r
e
m
i
p
e
s
a
m
d
o
l
elit,  
elit,  
e
ips  
do  
l
o
r
no  
n
l
o
r
s
i
t
G
l
a
o
r
e
e
e
d
d
d
um  
d
e
m
m
e
t
c
o
n
s
am  
e
t
co  
IN  
L
o
r
e
m
e
e
t
iam  
m
d
co  
elit,  
e
m
i
p
sum  
sum  
d
o
lo  
r
no  
n
sit  
a
a
l
u
a
n
e
laor  
Lorem ipsureet  
e
d
d
r
e
m
m
a
g
n
a
u
m
m
a
met  
m
i
s
m
od  
od  
G
d
o
l
o
m
non  
on  
umm  
d
o
l
o
r
s
i
agn  
a
a
l
i
q
u
y
a
n
i
b
h
con  
s
e
e
r
at  
t
inci  
e
r
a
d
i
iscin  
g
elit,  
m
o
re  
m
re ma  
t
amet  
e
u
ui  
i
s
m
m
c
te  
te  
t
ue  
dun  
laor  
e
d
d
i
a
s
u
m
ag  
y
n
t
c
o
m
e
o
d
t
inc  
r
a
dipiscing  
dipi  
t
ut  
reet  
t
ia  
m
d
o
n
a
al  
i
b
b
e
h
r
e
u
ns  
e
cte  
inc  
!
L
o
r
e
m
i
p
s
u
m
d
o
l
e
m
n
o
lo  
r
s
it  
a
iqua  
iquam  
e
u
i
s
c
tet  
i
d
u
n
scin  
g
elit, ed  
ed  
d
m
n
r
n
umm  
y nib  
bh  
m
et  
con  
co  
m
e
m
t
u
e
r
t
u
t
a
a
d
i
A
L
o
r
e
m
orie  
m
eip  
e
t
d
iam  
sum  
d
o
l
g
n
a
a
l
t
n
o
o
s
e
r
at  
t
i
nci  
d
u
c
i
TT  
E
elit,  
  p
do  
n
o
n
l
o
r
s
i
t
am  
am  
iq  
iq  
u
a
m
m
e
uis  
s
m
e
c
t
e
t
uer adip  
uer  
t
ng  
in  
g
!
l
a
o
r
e
e
e
d
d
i
lo  
r
e
e
m
a
umm  
e
r
d
adip  
A
V
PR ISO  
e
e
t
t
a
m
n
o
n
d
o
lo  
o
a
l
y
n
i
b
et  
co  
con  
at  
t
ti  
i
c
i
d
do  
do  
lo  
r
non  
ag umm  
ag  
y nibh eu  
bh  
r
b
h
e
n
s
e
d
u
n
i
 s
c
c
i
Lorem ip  
ip  
r
e
m
i
q
u
e
i
e
c
t
e
t
t
u
t
g
N
m
n
t
c
m
o
a
m
 d
t
s
m
m
o
d
u
e
r
L
o
Lorem  
laor  
eet  
elit,  
e
d
s
u
m
a
a
l
r
t
i
n
a
d
i
elit,  
laoreet  
Lorem ipeet  
elit, ed  
r
e
m
m
i
p
s
u
TIO  
DE  
N
e
l
i
r
e
m
do  
do  
i
q
u
a
a
m
m
er uism  
e
e
e
ctet  
tuer ad  
et  
c
i
d
un  
t
ut iscin  
ut  
,
ed diam  
iam  
ip  
s
EC  
non  
umm  
l
a
o
t
,
e
d
d
i
p
s
u
m
d
o
t
d
olo  
o
n
l
or  
s
r
uer  
g
non  
u
m
dd  
ol  
lo  
r
d
i
t
a
m
at  
t
in  
c
i
ad  
i
 p
d
m
d
o
i
e
e
t
d
d
um  
re  
re ma  
m
ag  
umm  
y ni  
bh e  
et  
me  
t
c
o
n
d
u
i
 s
c
c
i
i
lore  
re  
s
s
it  
Loremr  
elit rem  
lao t,  
ree  
i
p
s
u
m
o
l
o
o
l
o
r
 n
n
g
e
d
u
r
r
e
n
s
s
n
a
a
l
iq  
u
a
m
er  
ui  
s
e
ctet  
tet  
n
t
ut  
laor  
Lorem ee  
i
e
t
ed  
ip  
d
iam  
m
s
u
m
d
o
l
m
a
g
n
a
e
a
a
m
e
t
consec  
A
d
i
a
m
do magna  
n
m
u
m
i
t
a
m
e
u
m
s
m
t
u
e
elit,  
m
do  
sumdo  
l
o
r
e
m
a
n
o
or  
sit  
si  
t
a
nse  
UC  
adipi  
adip  
t
d
o
l
m
n
g
a
m
e
r
at  
od  
od  
r
ad  
i
L
o
a
o
d
i
p
p
sum  
o
n
umm  
aliq  
ame  
l
i
q
u
a
m
m
u
i
m
m
ctet  
inciu  
inci  
olore no  
m
lor sit  
magn my am liqu  
num sit  
gn  
a
a
c
t
i
n
c
d
r
s
o
d
t
u
e
r
o
n
s
e
c
e
l
i
t
,
e
d
e
e
i
p
i
a
e
u
s
e
c
t
u
t
r
umm  
aaliquy  
u
a
m
m
t
i
s
c
c
re  
a
h
id  
u
n
t
iscin  
ippiscing  
m
t
m
d
o
l
o
r
m
a
a
a
y nib  
bh  
t
co  
n
at  
uer  
g
laoreet ed diam  
eet iam  
s
u
m
no  
n
sit  
sit  
al  
iq  
e
u
s
e
d
u
i
IO  
inng  
e
t
c
o
a
n
m
n
m
s
i
s
mod  
t
i
e
t
u
e
r
a
d
do  
e
m
o
a
m
t
m
m
od  
od  
t
i
uer  
n
t
g
a
a
n
i
b
h
c
o
d
t
t
ue  
Lore  
elit, ed  
laoreet ed  
Lorem eet  
elit, ed  
ed d  
d
o
l
n
e
e
r
a
d
ut  
liquam  
h
e
e
u
s
oder  
e
t
e
a
t
incidur  
nt  
a
m
d
o
re  
re ma  
g
on  
u
n
t
a
a
a
m
bh  
nibh eu  
o
ns  
ns  
at  
t
i
n
c
dunt  
i
N
a
m
u
i
s
m
c
t
e
ip  
su  
su  
m
ag  
m
m
y
m
i
q
t
u
a
e
u
i
s
m
o
d
e
ctet  
t
e
t
u
e
r
a
d
i
p
i
s
c
i
 n
 g
c
i
i
 n
g
e
r
a
t
o
d
t
u
e
r
i
n
d
m
d
o
n
a
a
l
n
i
b
c
o
mn  
n
s
e
e
r
a
t
od  
er  
incidu  
adip  
ut  
t
t
inc  
a
d
u
t
g
m
d
o
l
n
o
lor  
r
iq  
iq  
u
am  
m
s
m
od  
od  
c
t
e
t
u
a
t
in  
in uer  
i
s
i
d
u
n
t
laor  
eet  
i
p
s
u
m
dolo  
l
o
r
r
s
m
ame  
umm  
o
s
it  
a
m
e
t
u
e
n
r
a
u
t
c
i
n
u
t
i
n
g
m
a
gn  
a
l
i
q
y
n
i
b
h
e
e
t
t
inci  
ut  
ippi  
dun  
t
ut  
t
d
i
t
do  
l
o
ia  
m
n
o
n
dolo  
c
o
nse  
nse  
i
sscinng  
g
r
sit  
al  
bh  
er uis  
incidunt ut  
iq  
e
c
t
e
t
u
Lore  
elit, rem  
doloia  
r
e
d
m
l
g
n
u
a
m
met con  
y nibh euti  
iquambh  
a
s
m
ec  
e
ua  
o
e
l
a
l
o
l
i
i
t
m
a
m
L
o
l
a
e
eli  
m
ipsu  
a
a
l
 s
c
on  
e
e
at  
t
e
t
uer  
cctetuer adip  
t
e
r
d
c
i
a
d
i
L
o
r
e
m
or  
r
i
e
e
,
e
d
d
d
r
e
ip  
m
m
um  
su  
m
on  
g
d
a
o
a
r
s
e
e
r
t
consecteretute, ed  
laoreeelit edlore  
t,  
di  
a
e
o
r
d
i
a
m
m
no  
m
d
iqua  
m
e
uism  
dun  
dunt  
t
u
t
e
l
i
t
,
r
e
m
e
t
d
iam  
um re no  
do  
lor  
 t
d
e
m
m
e
t
s
d
d
u
o
m
l
or  
no  
olor  
umm it am  
y ni  
s
er  
r
at  
t
inci  
adip  
dun  
i
issc  
laoree,t  
e
d
d
r
e
i
p
s
o
l
o
n
aore  
i
a
m
n
u
m
o
r
e
 d
a
n
c
i
ree  
t
d
iam nondo  
no  
m
u
m
m
s
i
t
a
et  
d
m
n
o
l
or  
s
i
m
et  
c
t
ut  
d
olo  
l
o
a
g
n
m
y
n
i
b
m
e
e
t
olore  
ma  
o
n
um  
mm  
si  
  t
a
a
m
a
l
i
q
n
i
b
h
e
eui  
u
i
s
m
o
o
n
d
c
r
e
m
a
g
n
u
r
l
i
c
o
n
i
b
a
a
m
s
i
a
m
am  
m
a
e
r
et  
q
u
h
con  
g
n
a
y nibh  
bh  
t
u
c
c
a
o
m
e
r
ctt  
smo  
t
e
tuer  
tuer adi  
ma  
gn  
m
m
e
u
m
s
e
e
n
s
e
r
ct  
a
d
in  
cidunt  
a
ut  
d
y
n
h
e
t
a
m
i
s
c
i
p
i
 s
c
a
m
e
u
u
i
i
s
s
m
s
e
c
t
e
e
a
 c
i
d
inc  
ntdiptiet niscue  
idunt  
nt isc  
ut ing  
ci  
r
d
adipiscing  
at  
u
r
t
i
nc  
u
n
nt  
t
d
ippis  
ut is  
ut  
c
i
ut  
a
a
i
b
c
o
m
o
d
t
u
a
m
e
r
uism  
uism  
e
t
u
e
r
a
nt  
g
c
ing  
ing  
liqu  
h
m
n
d
ce  
t
t
t
t
u
e
u
a
e
r
a
t
o
d
t
ue  
t
inc  
idu dip  
nt utisc  
t
a
u
t
i
n
g
A A  
M
PS  
V V  
O
L
T
S
A
O
U
T
P
LINCOLN  
U
T
W
ELD  
ELECTRIC  
TE  
SE  
R
M
IN  
AL  
S
W
A
R
N
IN  
LE  
I
N
CT  
G
V
• The machine must be located where there is free cir-  
culation of clean air such that air movement in the  
back, out the sides and bottom will not be restricted.  
E
R
T
E
O
C
V
3
5
0
-
P
R
O
E
R
O
N
F
• Dirt and dust that can be drawn into the machine  
should be kept to a minimum. Failure to observe  
these precautions can result in excessive operating  
temperatures and nuisance shutdown.  
Single Phase Input  
Connect green lead to ground per National Electrical  
Code.  
Connect black and white leads to power.  
Wrap red lead with tape to provide 600V insulation.  
Three Phase Input  
• Keep machine dry. Shelter from rain and snow. Do  
not place on wet ground or in puddles.  
• DO NOT MOUNT OVER COMBUSTIBLE SURFACES.  
Connect green lead to ground per National Electric  
Code.  
Connect black, red and white leads to power.  
CAUTION  
Where there is a combustible surface directly under  
stationary or fixed electrical equipment, that surface  
shall be covered with a steel plate at least .06”(1.6mm)  
thick, which shall extend not less than 5.90”(150mm)  
beyond the equipment on all sides.  
CONNECTIONS OF WIRE FEEDERS TO V350-PRO  
LN-25 Connection Instructions  
(Factory, Construction & Advanced Process versions  
can be connected.-Not recommended for Pulse  
Welding with the Advanced Process Model).  
• Turn the Invertec power switch "off".  
STACKING  
V350-PRO cannot be stacked.  
• Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal of polar-  
ity required by electrode. Connect the work lead to the  
other terminal.  
TILTING  
Place the machine directly on a secure, level surface  
or on a recommended undercarriage. The machine  
may topple over if this procedure is not followed.  
• LN-25 with Remote Control options can be used with the  
Factory Advanced Process version of the V350. The 6-Pin  
(K444-1) and 14-pin (K444-2) remotes can be connected  
directly to the 6-pin & 14-pin MS-style connectors. The 42  
Volt Remote Voltage and Output Control (K624-1) Kit can  
be connected to the V350’s 14-pin MS-style connector  
using Remote Control Cable assembly K627- [ ]. LN-25s  
with a K431-1 remote kit can be connected to the V350’s  
14-pin MS-style connector using a K432 cable and K876  
adapter. (See connection diagram S19899). Or the K432  
cable could be modified with a K867 Universal Adapter  
Plug (See connection diagram S19405) to connect it to the  
V350’s 14-pin MS-style connector.  
INPUT AND GROUNDING CONNECTIONS  
• Only a qualified electrician should connect the  
Invertec V350-PRO. Installation should be made in  
accordance with the appropriate National Electrical  
Code, all local codes and the information detailed  
below.  
• When received directly from the factory, multiple volt-  
age machines are internally connected for 460VAC.  
If 460VAC is the desired input, then the machine may  
be connected to the power system without any setup  
required inside the machine.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-4  
A-4  
INSTALLATION  
Cobramatic Connection Instructions  
LN-7 Connection Instructions  
A Cobramatic can only be used with the “Factory” &  
Advanced Processversions of the 350-Pro.  
• Turn the Invertec power switch "off"  
An LN-7 can only be used with the “Factory” &  
Advanced Processversions of the 350-Pro.  
• Turn the Invertec power switch "off".  
• Connect the control cable from the Cobramatic to  
the 14-pin MS-style connector.  
• Connect the K480 control cable from the LN-7 to the  
14-pin MS-style connector.  
• Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal  
of the polarity required by electrode. Connect the  
work lead to the other terminal.  
• Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal of the  
polarity required by electrode. Connect the work lead to  
the other terminal.  
• Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the  
Invertec to coincide with wire feeder polarity used.  
• If a remote control such as K857 is to be used with  
the Cobramatic, the remote can be connected  
directly to the 6-pin MS-style connector on the front  
of the Invertec or use a K864 adapter to connect  
the cobramatic and the remote to the 14-pin MS-  
style connector.  
Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the Invertec  
to coincide with wire feeder polarity used. The wire  
feeder will now display the welding voltage.  
• If K480 is not available, see connection diagram  
S19404 for modification of K291 or K404 LN-7 input  
cable with K867 Universal Adapter Plug.  
If a remote control such as K857 is to be used with the  
LN-7, the remote can be connected directly to the 6-pin  
MS-style connector on the front of the Invertec or use a  
K864 adapter to connect the LN-7 and the remote to the  
14-pin MS-style connector. (See connection diagram  
S19901)  
TIG Module K930-2  
The TIG Module connects to the Factory and Advanced  
Process V350-Pro versions with a K936-1 (9-14 pin)  
control cable. Connect the K936-1 to the MS-style  
connector.  
LN-10 Connection Instructions  
An LN-10 can only be used with the “Factory” &  
Advanced Processversions of the 350-Pro.  
The TIG Module can also be used with the V350-Pro  
Construction version. A K936-4 control cable is  
required to supply 115VAC to the TIG Module from an  
external 115VAC supply.  
Turn the Invertec power switch "off"  
Connect the K1505 control cable from the LN-10 to the  
14-pin MS-style connector.  
Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal of  
polarity required by the electrode. Connect the work lead  
to the other terminal.  
General Instructions for Connection of Wire  
Feeders to V350-Pro  
Wire feeders other than those listed above may be  
used provided that the auxiliary power supply rating of  
the V350-Pro is not exceeded. K867 universal adapter  
plug is required. See connection diagram S24985 on  
page F-4.  
Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the Invertec  
to coincide with wire feeder polarity used.  
See the LN-10 manual for details on accessing Control  
DIP Switch  
LN-742 Connection Instructions  
REMOTE CONTROL OF INVERTEC  
Remote Control K857, Hand Amptrol K963 and Foot  
Amptrol K870.  
An LN-742 can only be used with the “Factory” &  
Advanced Processversions of the 350-Pro.  
• Turn the Invertec power switch "off"  
• Either a K591 or a K593 Input cable assembly is  
required to connect the LN-742 to the Invertec.  
• Connect the control cable from the LN-742 to the  
14-pin MS-style connector.  
• Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal  
of the polarity required by electrode. Connect the  
work lead to the other terminal.  
UNDERCARRIAGE MOUNTINGS  
MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS  
NOTE: MOUNTING SCREWS CAN NOT PROTR  
UDE MORE THAN  
CHES INSIDE THE MACHINE.  
0.5 IN  
3.50  
• Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the  
Invertec to coincide with wire feeder polarity used.  
The wire feeder will now display the welding volt-  
age.  
1/4-20 NUT (4 PLACES)  
5.50  
• If a remote control such as K857 is to be used with the  
LN-742, the remote can be connected directly to the 6-pin  
MS-style connector on the front of the Invertec or use a  
K864 adapter to connect the LN-742 and the remote to  
the 14-pin MS-style connector.  
10.00  
4/01  
11.8  
4
M19527  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-5  
A-5  
INSTALLATION  
PARALLEL OPERATION  
The V350-Pro can be paralleled in CC mode. For best  
results, the currents of each machine should be rea-  
sonably well shared. As an example, with two  
machines set up in parallel for a 400 amp procedure,  
each machine should be set to deliver approximately  
200 amps, not 300 amps from one and 100 amps from  
the other. This will minimize nuisance shutdown con-  
ditions. In general, more than two machines in paral-  
lel will not be effective due to the voltage requirements  
of procedures in that power range.  
To set machine outputs, start with output control pots  
and arc control pots in identical positions. Use the  
output control pots to balance the currents and main-  
tain the desired current. The arc control pots should  
be kept identical on the two machines.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-6  
A-6  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section B-1  
Section B-1  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
- OPERATION SECTION -  
Operation...............................................................................................................................Section B  
Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................B-2  
General Description..............................................................................................................B-2  
Duty Cycle............................................................................................................................B-2  
Operational Features and Controls ............................................................................................B-2  
Weld Mode Select.......................................................................................................................B-3  
CC-Stick Soft..................................................................................................................B-3  
CC-Stick Crisp................................................................................................................B-3  
TIG GTAW .......................................................................................................................B-4  
CV-Wire...........................................................................................................................B-4  
CV-Innersheild.................................................................................................................B-4  
Advanced Process Panel............................................................................................................B-5  
Controls ......................................................................................................................................B-6  
Electrode Material.......................................................................................................................B-6  
Hot Start & Arc Control...............................................................................................................B-6  
Weld Mode Details......................................................................................................................B-7  
Pulse Programs ..........................................................................................................................B-8  
Lower Case Front .......................................................................................................................B-9  
CV Modes.............................................................................................................................B-9  
TIG Mode .............................................................................................................................B-9  
CC-Stick Modes...................................................................................................................B-9  
Types of Remote Output Control................................................................................................B-9  
Types of Remote Weld Terminal Control ....................................................................................B-9  
Auxiliary Power .........................................................................................................................B-10  
Limitations.................................................................................................................................B-10  
Recommended Processes........................................................................................................B-10  
Descriptions of Special Welding Processes Available on this Machine...................................B-11  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-2  
B-2  
OPERATION  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
DUTY CYCLE  
The V350-Pro is rated at 350 amps, 60% duty cycle  
(based on a 10 minute cycle). It is also rated at 300  
amps, 100% duty cycle.  
WARNING  
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.  
• Do not touch electrically live parts or  
electrode with skin or wet clothing.  
• Insulate yourself from work and  
ground.  
OPERATIONAL FEATURES and CONTROLS:  
UPPER CONTROL PANEL  
1. AMPS Meter  
• Always wear dry insulating gloves.  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
FUMES AND GASES can be dangerous.  
• Keep your head out of fumes.  
• Prior to STICK or TIG operation (current flow), the  
meter displays preset current value (+/- 2 amps or  
+/- 3%, whichever is greater).  
• Prior to CV operation, the meter displays four dash-  
es indicating non-presettable AMPS.  
• Use ventilation or exhaust to remove  
fumes from breathing zone.  
• During welding, this meter displays actual average  
amps.  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
WELDING SPARKS can cause fire or  
explosion.  
• After welding, the meter holds the actual current  
value for 5 seconds. Output adjustment while in the  
"hold" period results in the "prior to operation" char-  
acteristics stated above. The displays blink indicat-  
ing that the machine is in the "Hold" period.  
• Keep flammable material away.  
• Do not weld on closed containers.  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
ARC RAYS can burn eyes and skin.  
• Wear eye, ear and body  
2. VOLT METER  
• Prior to CV operation (current flow), the meter dis-  
plays desired preset voltage value (+/- .5V).  
• Prior to STICK or TIG operation, the meter displays  
the Open Circuit Voltage of the Power Source or four  
dashes if the output has not been turned on.  
• During welding, this meter displays actual average  
volts.  
protection.  
------------------------------------------------------------  
See additional warning information at  
front of this operators manual.  
• After welding, the meter holds the actual voltage  
value for 5 seconds. The displays blink indicating  
that the machine is in the "Hold" period.  
• Output adjustment while in the "hold" period results  
in the "prior to operation" characteristics stated  
above.  
-----------------------------------------------------------  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The Invertec V350-Pro offers multi-process CV, CC,  
and DC welding and is rated 350 amps, 34 volts at a  
60% duty cycle. The V350-Pro is available in either a  
Construction version (no wire feeder connection and  
auxiliary power) and a Factory & Advanced Process  
versions (includes wire feeder connection and related  
power)  
3. OUTPUT CONTROL  
• Output control is conducted via a single turn poten-  
tiometer.  
• Adjustment is indicated by the meters as stated  
above.  
• When in TIG modes, this control sets the maximum  
welding current. Full depression of a foot or hand  
Amptrol results in the preset level of current.  
.
• The factory model is the construction model with  
the addition of the Wire Feeder/Remote Adapter.  
• In this form, the V350-Pro provides the hardware to  
power and connect to 24, 42 or 115 VAC wire feeders.  
4. WELD TERMINALS-REMOTE / ON  
• Two status lights indicate the location of trigger con-  
trol as determined by the "WELD TERMINALS" push  
button.  
• If trigger control is local "weld terminals on", the ON  
display will be lit.  
• The advanced process model is the factory model  
with an advanced process panel installed in place of  
the standard mode panel. In this form, the V350-Pro  
provides access to the 5 standard weld modes (Stick  
Soft, Stick Crisp, TIG, CV-Wire, CV-Innershield),  
gouge, constant power and pulse MIG weld modes.  
• If trigger control is remote "weld terminals remotely  
controlled", the REMOTE display will be lit.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-3  
B-3  
OPERATION  
• The unit will power up in "pre-determined preferred"  
trigger modes.  
7. WELD MODE SELECT - FACTORY AND  
CONSTRUCTION (See Figure B.1)  
The Mode Control button selects from the following  
welding modes.  
STICK = ON  
CV = REMOTE  
TIG = REMOTE if remote output controls are attached  
to the machine.  
TIG = 0N if remote output controls are not attached to  
the machine.  
CC-STICK SOFT: The Stick Soft process features con-  
tinuous control ranging from 5 to 425 amps. This mode  
was intended for most SMAW applications, and Arc  
Gouging.  
For all versions, these trigger modes can be over-ridden  
(switched) with the WELD TERMINALS push button. When  
changed, the unit will power up in the configuration it was in  
when it was last powered down.  
Arc Gouging: Setting the output of the Stick Soft  
mode to 425 amps will enable the arc-gouging  
mode. The actual output current will depend on the  
size of carbon used. The recommended maximum  
size carbon is 5/16".  
5. THERMAL  
• This status light indicates when the power source has been  
driven into thermal overload. If the output terminals were  
"ON", the "ON" light will blink indicating that the output will  
be turned back on once the unit cools down to an accept-  
able temperature level. If the unit was operating in the  
"REMOTE" mode, the trigger will need to be opened  
before or after the thermal has cleared and closed after the  
machine has cooled down to an acceptable temperature to  
establish output.  
• The Hot Start control regulates the starting current  
at arc initiation. Hot Start can be adjusted from min-  
imum (0), with no additional current added at arc  
start, to maximum (10), with double the preset cur-  
rent or 425 amps (max of machine) added for the  
first second after arc initiation.  
• The Arc Control regulates the Arc Force to adjust  
the short circuit current. The minimum setting (-10)  
will produce a "soft" arc and will produce minimal  
spatter. The maximum setting (+10) will produce a  
"crisp" arc and will minimize electrode sticking.  
6. CONTROL-REMOTE / LOCAL  
• Two status lights indicate the location of output control as  
pre-determined by the power sources auto-configure sys-  
tem.  
• The LOCAL display will be lit when control is at the power  
source.  
• The REMOTE display will be lit when a remote pot/control  
is detected.  
These Output Control configurations can be overridden  
(switched) with the CONTROL push button. When changed,  
the unit will power up in the configuration it was in when it  
was last powered down.  
CC-STICK CRISP:The Stick Crisp mode features con-  
tinuous control from 5 to 425 amps. This mode was  
intended primarily for pipe welding applications.  
• The Hot Start control regulates the starting current at  
arc initiation. Hot Start can adjust starting current up  
or down by 25% of the preset value. The recom-  
mended setting for Hot Start is 5 where the initial cur-  
rent is equal to the preset current.  
Hidden Middle Control Panel – Mode Panel  
FIGURE B.1.  
2
3
1
5
6
AMPS  
VOLTS  
CONTROL  
SELECT  
WELD TERMINALS  
REMOTE  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
OUTPUT  
4
SELECT  
HOT START  
ARC CONTROL  
5
0
6
CC-STICK SOFT 7018  
CC-STICK CRISP 6010  
TIG GTAW  
4
-2  
+2  
7
3
7
-4  
+4  
+6  
+8  
2
8
-6  
-8  
CV-WIRE  
1
0
CV-FLUX CORED  
SELECT  
-10  
+10  
10  
SOFT  
CRISP  
8
11  
12  
9
10  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-4  
B-4  
OPERATION  
CV-WIRE: The CV-WIRE mode features continuous  
control from 10 to 40 volts. The mode was intended for  
most GMAW, FCAW, and MCAW applications.  
• The Arc Control regulates the Arc Force to adjust the  
short circuit current. The minimum setting (-10) will  
produce a "soft" arc and will produce minimal spat-  
ter. The maximum setting (+10) will produce a "crisp"  
arc and will minimize electrode sticking.  
• The Hot Start control is not used in the CV-WIRE  
mode.  
• The Arc Control regulates pinch effect. At the mini-  
mum setting (-10), minimizes pinch and results in a  
soft arc. Low pinch settings are preferable for weld-  
ing with gas mixes containing mostly inert gases. At  
the maximum setting (+10), maximizes pinch effect  
and results in a crisp arc. High pinch settings are  
preferable for welding FCAW and GMAW with CO2.  
TIG GTAW: The TIG mode features continuous control  
from 5 to 425 amps. The TIG mode can be run in either  
the TIG touch start or high frequency (optional equip-  
ment required) assisted start mode.  
• The Hot Start control selects the starting mode  
desired. A setting of less than 5, the TIG lift start  
mode is selected. The OCV is controlled below 10v  
and the short circuit "TIG touch" current is main-  
tained at 25 amps independent of the preset current.  
When the tungsten is lifted, an arc is initiated and  
the output is regulated at the preset value. Hot start  
settings between 0 and 5 regulate the arc initiation  
current. A setting of 5 results in the most positive arc  
initiation. A setting of 0 reduces hot start.  
CV-INNERSHEILD: The CV-INNERSHEILD mode  
features continuous control from 10 to 45 volts. This  
mode was designed for self-shielded flux cored wires  
that require tight voltage control.  
• The Hot Start control is not active in the CV-FLUX  
CORED mode.  
• The Arc Control regulates pinch effect. At the mini-  
mum setting (-10), minimizes pinch and results in a  
soft arc. At the maximum setting (+10), maximizes  
pinch effect and results in a crisp arc. Most self-  
shielded wires work well at an Arc Control setting of 5.  
• Hot Start settings between 5 and 10, select high fre-  
quency assisted starting TIG mode. In this range,  
the OCV of the machine is controlled between 50  
and 70 volts. If using the Lincoln K930-1 TIG  
Module, set the Hot start to 10 for maximum OCV.  
• The Arc Control is not used in the TIG mode.  
TIG SOLENOID OPTION  
The Solenoid only operates when the V350 is in the  
TIG mode. If the Weld Terminals are in “Remote” then  
the solenoid will open when the arc start switch is  
closed. The solenoid will close after the arc switch has  
been opened and the post flow time expired.  
If the Weld Terminals are turned “ON”, then the sole-  
noid will open when the electrode is touched to the  
work. The electrode needs to remain in contact with  
the work to allow for gas coverage before attempting to  
start the arc. The solenoid will close after the arc has  
been broken and the post flow time expired.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-5  
B-5  
OPERATION  
Pulsed Modes  
In Pulse Modes;  
7A. ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL  
(See Figure B.2)  
The work point will be in the Amps window and  
should be set close to the wire feed speed of the  
wire feeder in inches per minute. The Volts window  
will have SPd displayed indicating Wire Feed  
Speed. Once current starts flowing and during the 5  
second “Hold” feature the displays will show amps  
and volts.  
To program Welding modes. SELECT knob is used to  
Scroll through all Welding modes. The MEMORY but-  
ton is used to store and access Welding modes into  
locations M1 thru M8.  
Modes:  
In addition to the 5 welding modes described in SEC-  
TION 7, the Advanced Process Panel allows you to  
select the Following additional modes.  
Pulse Mode features that are displayed while select-  
ing a Welding pulse mode are listed below;  
Steel - .030, .035, .045, .052 – Argon Blends  
Stainless Steel - .030, .035, .045 – Argon Blends &  
Helium/Argon Blends  
Aluminum - .035, 3/64, 1/16 – 4043 & 5356  
Metal Core - .045, .052 – Argon Blends  
Nickel - .035, .045 – Argon/Helium blends  
Power Mode  
In the Power Mode;  
The work point will be in the Volts window. The Amp  
window will have CP displayed indicating Constant  
Power. Once current starts flowing and during the 5  
second “Hold” feature the displays will show Volts  
and Amps respectively. Refer to the detailed expla-  
nation at the end of this section.  
Refer to the detailed explanation at the end of this  
section.  
Gouge  
Air Carbon Arc Cutting (CAC-A) is a physical means  
of removing base metal or weld metal by using a car-  
bon electrode, an electric arc and compressed air.  
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL VERSION  
FIGURE B.2  
OUTPUT KNOB  
AMPS  
OLTS  
V
7A  
CONTROL  
SELECT  
WELD TERMINALS  
REMOTE  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
ADJUST  
MEMORY  
SELECT  
SELECT  
MEMORY BUTTON  
(M1 THRU M8)  
ADJUSST KNOB  
(0 THRU 10-HOT START)  
(-10 THRU 0 AND  
0 THRU +10-ARC CONTROL)  
SELECT KNOB  
(SCOLLS WELDIING PRROCESSES)  
SELECT BUTTON  
(HOT START OR ARC CONTROL)  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-6  
B-6  
OPERATION  
5. After all adjustments have been made press and  
hold the Memory button until the display changes.  
The right and the left window will display what  
memory to save in, lets say M1. To store in M1 push  
the Memory button again to save the Pulse Mig  
mode to memory M1.  
CONTROLS: (See Figure B.2.)  
The MEMORY button and SELECT knob are used  
together to select a welding process and store it in  
memory (M1 thru M8). The SELECT knob scrolls  
through the, welding process modes and memory M1  
thru M8. The MEMORY button stores the welding  
process in memory.  
SELECT button" (The right button) selects between  
the "Hot Start" or "Arc Control". The < will indicate the  
active feature shown below.  
6. The display in the digital windows will read as follows:  
M1 Pulse MIG  
Steel .035  
Argon Blends  
Arc Cntrl 1.2  
7. Saving or entering a second welding mode to a  
memory, M2. Turn the Select knob until the desired  
welding process mode is displayed in right digital  
window. Then follow steps 1 thru 6.  
Press the Memory button till the digital window  
reads,  
Right Digital Window  
"Hot Start"  
(-10 to 0 +10)  
"Arc Control" (0 to 10) <  
• The ADJUST knob adjusts the desired settings for  
the Hot Start or Arc Control feature that is active.  
Save to MEM  
M2  
WELDING PROCESS MODES AVAILABLE  
Press the Memory button again and the New  
Welding process is saved in M2.  
Stick SMAW, TIG GTAW  
Gouge CAG, CV MIG GMAW  
CV Flux Core, Pulse MIG  
8. Adjust the output control to the correct wire feed set-  
ting and the V350-PRO is ready to weld again.  
(Note: The wire feed speed setting is not stored in  
memory and will need to be reset.)  
ELECTRODE MATERIAL  
Steel, Metal Core, Stainless, Aluminum, Nickel  
9. Adjust the Arc Control and note that the M1 goes  
away indicating that the V350-PRO settings no  
longer match what is stored in memory. Going back  
to the original settings will not bring the M1 back.  
You will need to push the Memory button to recall  
the original settings in M1.  
EXAMPLE OF SAVING WELDING MODES TO MEM-  
ORY  
The following example is how to select Pulse MIG  
using .035 steel and store it into memory.  
1. Turn the Select knob until welding process is dis-  
Note: After all memory’s M1 thru M8 are used and the  
welder needs to store another welding process, a new  
welding process will overwrite what was originally in  
the memory and will read,  
played.  
LEFT WINDOW  
Pulse MIG  
RIGHT WINDOW  
Argon Blends  
Steel .035  
Save to MEM  
M1 Overwrite  
2. Wait two seconds and the right window will display  
Arc Control on the second line on the right side.  
M1 which stored Pulse Mig is Overwritten with the new  
welding process.  
Pulse MIG  
Argon Blends  
Steel .035  
Arc Cntrl ### <  
LN-10/DH-10 Wire Feeder Compatibility Note:  
The LN-10 and DH-10 feeders can be used to pulse  
weld and in the power mode with the panel. The dis-  
plays on the LN-10 & DH-10 do not show the wire feed  
speed or power.  
3. SPd is displayed in the upper right Volts window.  
The left Amps window matches the desired wire  
feed speed that is set on the wire feeder. Adjust the  
Output knob until desired number is displayed.  
4. Start welding. If the arc length is too short turn the  
Output knob up. If the arc length is too long turn the  
Output knob down.  
8. HOT START and ARC CONTROL features  
have different functions depending on the welding  
Mode that is active. Each feature is described under  
the welding mode heading. (See Item 7 or 7.A for  
specified Mode Operations) (See Figure B.1 or B.2)  
The Arc Control which is displayed in the right digital  
window can be used to fine-tune the arc length and  
characteristics.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-7  
B-7  
OPERATION  
WELD MODE DETAILS:  
Mode  
Range  
Comments  
Stick Soft  
5 - 425 amps The stick soft mode is the best selection for general stick  
applications.  
Arc Control = Arc Force  
Hot Start = Initial hot start current (min = start a match set amps, Max.  
= greatest hot start current) During hot start, arc force is set  
at high and is fast response.  
For gouging applications: Turn current up to 425 amps.  
Stick Crisp  
5 - 425 amps The stick crisp mode features an aggressive arc force routine well suit-  
ed for Exx10, Exx11 series electrodes.  
Arc Control = Arc Force  
Hot Start = Initial hot start current (Mid range = welding current and will  
vary up and down with knobcontrol.) During hot start, arc  
force is set at high and is fast response.  
For gouging applications: Turn current up to 425 amps.  
GTAW (Tig mode)  
5 - 425 amps The tig mode produces a soft, steady constant current waveform for  
either touch start or high frequency assisted start DC GTAW applica-  
tions.  
Hot Start = Min to Mid range = Touch start with low OCV  
Mid to Max range = High frequency assistedstarting with adjustable  
OCV up to 70 volts.  
GMAW - CV  
FCAW-SS  
10 - 45 volts  
10 - 45 volts  
The GMAW - CV mode is the best selection for general MIG welding,  
Metal core, and gas shielded applications.  
Arc Control = Pinch (Min = min pinch, softest arc),  
(Max = max pinch, crispest arc)  
The FCAW-SS mode is designed for Self Shielded Innershield products  
that require tight voltage control. For example; the NR 203 series or NR  
207)  
Arc Control = Pinch (Min = min pinch, softest arc),  
(Max = max pinch, crispest arc, )  
ADVANCED PULSE PANEL WELDING PROGRAMS  
Gouging  
60 - 425 amps The gouging mode is a low power version of other Lincoln welding  
equipment gouging programs, for example a PowerWave 455.  
GMAW - Power  
1 - 18 (No Units) Refer to the detailed explanation at the end of this section.  
This mode does not allow preset voltage. In the short arc GMAW  
mode, the set KW will not equal the actual Volts * Amps. The set  
power is regulated only when an arc is present. During shorting, the  
output is allowed to increase to clear the short.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-8  
B-8  
OPERATION  
PULSE PROGRAMS:  
MODE  
Range (IPM*)  
COMMENTS  
.030 Steel  
.035 Steel  
.045 Steel  
.052 Steel  
.045 Metal Core  
.052 Metal Core  
.030 Stainless Ar Blends  
.030 Stainless He Ar CO2  
.035 Stainless Ar Blends  
.035 Stainless He Ar CO2  
.045 Stainless Ar Blends  
.045 Stainless He Ar CO2  
.035 Aluminum 4043  
.035 Aluminum 5356  
3/64 Aluminum 4043  
3/64 Aluminum 5356  
1/16 Aluminum 4043  
1/16 Aluminum 5356  
65 - 1200  
55 - 800  
50 - 700  
75 - 550  
50 - 650  
50 - 500  
85 - 770  
110 - 770  
65 - 770  
75 - 770  
50 - 600  
50 - 600  
100 - 700  
115 - 740  
80 - 550  
85 - 700  
75 - 325  
75 - 450  
The V350 pulse programs are non-synergic and allow independent  
control of the wire feed speed (at the wire feeder) and the arc  
length. The Output Control Knob on the V350, adjusts an "SPD"  
value. Similar to trim, the "SPD" value indicates the relative arc  
length setting. The "SPD" value displayed on the V350 may not  
match the actual wire feed speed! The value of "SPD" is meant  
to be a point at which to set the arc length relative to the wire feed  
speed and should be set the same as actual speed for a starting  
point. Depending on the application, the "SPD" value can be adjust-  
ed to obtain the desired arc length. Refer to the detailed explana-  
tion at the end of this section.  
The operation of the Arc Control knob on the V350 is similar to the  
PowerWave series. As Arc Control is increased, the frequency is  
increased and the background reduced. Decreasing Arc Control will  
reduce frequency and increase background current. Arc Control  
acts to fine tune the arc plasma to the specific application.  
Preferred gas selections:  
Steel Argon Blends = Argon with CO2 additions from 2 to 20  
% or Oxygen additions from 2 to 5%.  
Stainless Argon Blends = Argon with Oxygen additions up to 2%.  
Stainless He Ar CO2 = ~ 90% Helium, 7 1/2 % Argon 2 1/2 CO2  
Aluminum 100% Argon  
.035 Nickel Alloys (Non Adaptive)  
.045 Nickel Alloys (Non Adaptive)  
80 - 700  
75 - 550  
The Nickel Alloy pulse programs are non adaptive. The operator  
sets the output control knob to deliver the correct arc length at  
desired wire feed speed and stick out. While welding, the operator  
manipulates the stick out to maintain the correct arc length. This  
method of operation produces very stable arc performance consid-  
ering the nature of nickel alloys.  
Preferred gas: Argon/Helium Blends = for the best results add  
helium to the argon base from 0-25%.  
PULSE ON PULSE  
.035 4043 (4x Pulse on Pulse) 120 - 600  
3/64 4043 (4x Pulse on Pulse) 85 - 400  
.035 5356 (5x Pulse on Pulse) 130 - 700  
3/64 5356 (5x Pulse on Pulse) 100 - 550  
Arc Control = Pulse on Pulse frequency. For faster travel  
speed welds, the arc control should be increased.  
For larger puddle, slower travel speeds, the arc control  
should be decreased. Refer to the detailed explanation at the  
end of this section.  
*IPM (INCHES PER MINUTE)  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-9  
B-9  
OPERATION  
LOWER CASE PANEL  
The output studs, line switch and remote connector are  
located on the lower case front.  
Types of Remote OUTPUT CONTROL  
• The Invertec V350-Pro’s Output Control can be con-  
trolled by either a potentiometer connected between  
77 & 75 with the wiper connected to 76 or a 0V to  
10V DC supply connected between 76 & 75. (76  
needs to be positive)  
9. Both terminals are "Twist-Mate" connectors.  
The Negative terminal is configured to accept the  
pass through gas system.  
10. The METER POLARITY switch is located above  
the output connectors. The switch provides a work  
connection for wire feeder voltmeters. Place the  
switch in the position of the electrode polarity indi-  
cated by the decal. The switch does not change  
the welding polarity.  
• 14-Pin Ms-style connector lead 75 is pin G, lead 76  
is pin F and lead 77 is pin E.  
• 6-Pin Ms-style connector lead 75 is pin C, lead 76 is  
pin B and lead 77 is pin A.  
Potentiometer Control  
11. 6-pin MS-style connector for remote control.  
12. 14-pin MS-style connector for wire feeder connec-  
• The total resistance should be between 2000 ohms  
(2K) and 10,000 ohms (10K)  
• The machine output will be at minimum when lead  
76 (wiper) is at the end of the potentiometer that is  
connected to 75. The machine’s output will increase  
as the wiper of the potentiometer is moved to the end  
that is connected to 77. (Note: In TIG mode, moving  
the lead 76 (wiper) to lead 77 would produce the cur-  
rent that has been set by the Invertec V350-Pro’s  
front panel Output Control.)  
tion and remote control.  
REMOTE CONTROL of the OUTPUT CONTROL and  
WELD TERMINALS  
The Invertec V350-Pro has auto sensing of remote out-  
put controls. If after connecting or removing a remote,  
the Invertec V350-Pro did not configure the way you  
would like the local or remote control settings can be  
changed by pushing the OUTPUT CONTROL or  
WELD TERMINAL button. (A user cannot select  
between the 6 and 14 pin MS-style connectors.)  
• Remotes of this type offered by Lincoln Electric are  
the K857, K812 and K870.  
Voltage Control  
• The supply must be an isolated supply. (Not refer-  
enced to earth ground, any auxiliary power from the  
Invertec V350-Pro or the welding output) The supply  
should be capable of supplying at least 20mA.  
• 0 volts supplied to 76 will set the Invertec V350-Pro  
to minimum output for the mode that has been  
selected while 10 volts supplied to 76 will set the  
Invertec V350-Pro to the maximum output for the  
mode. (Note: In TIG mode, 10 volts supplied to lead  
76 would produce the current that has been set by  
the Invertec V350-Pro’s front panel Output Control.)  
CV modes  
• The remote will default to the 14-pin MS-style con-  
nector if a remote is connected. If no remote is con-  
nected to the 14-pin MS-style connector then the  
remote will default to the 6-pin MS-style connector if  
a remote is connected to it.  
• In all of the CV modes, the WELD TERMINAL con-  
trol will default to REMOTE.  
TIG mode  
• The remote will default to the 6-pin MS-style if a  
remote control is connected to the 6-pin MS-style  
and to the 14-pin MS-style connector. If a remote is  
not connected to the 6-pin MS-style connector then  
the remote will default to the 14-pin MS-style con-  
nector if a remote is connected.  
• If a remote control is connected to any of the MS-  
style connectors the WELD TERMINAL control will  
default to REMOTE. If there are not any remote con-  
trol devices attached the WELD TERMINAL control  
will default to ON.  
Types of Remote WELD TERMINAL Control  
• The Invertec V350-Pro’s Weld Terminals can be con-  
trolled from each of the MS-style connectors. The  
circuit has a nominal OCV of 15VDC and requires a  
dry contact closure (less than 100 ohms) to activate  
the output of the Invertec V350-Pro.  
• 14-Pin MS-style connector, the Weld Terminals are  
controlled from pin C (lead 2) and pin D (lead 4). Pin  
C is positive.  
• 6-Pin MS-style connector, the Weld Terminals are  
controlled from pin D (lead 2) and pin E (lead 4). In  
the 6-pin MS-style connector pin D is positive.  
CC-Stick modes  
• The remote will default to only the 6-pin MS-style  
connector if a remote is connected to it.  
• The WELD TERMINAL control will default to ON with  
or without a remote connected.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-10  
B-10  
OPERATION  
AUXILIARY POWER  
• 115VAC, 42VAC and 24VAC power is available from  
the 14-pin MS-style connector. The Construction  
model of the Invertec V350-Pro does not have the  
14-pin MS-style connector) These supplies are  
intended to supply power for auxiliary equipment like  
wire feeders and the TIG Module.  
• 115VAC supply is rated at 2 amps and is protected by a 3.5  
amp breaker.  
• 42 VAC supply is rated at 5.5 amps and is protected  
by a 6 amp breaker.  
• 24 VAC supply is rated at 5.5 amps and is protected  
by a 6 amp breaker.  
LIMITATIONS  
• The V350-Pro is not recommended for processes  
other than those listed.  
• The V350-Pro can only be used with the recom-  
mended equipment and options.  
RECOMMENDED PROCESSES  
Properly equipped, the Invertec V350-Pro supports  
GMAW-P, FCAW, SMAW, GTAW and CAC-A  
processes for a variety of materials, including mild  
steel, stainless steel, cored wires, and aluminum.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-11  
B-11  
OPERATION  
• For steel, use 75/25 Ar/CO2 shield gas.  
• For Stainless, select a Helium blend Tri-Mix.  
• For Aluminum, use 100% Ar.  
SPECIAL WELDING PROCESSES  
AVAILABLE ON THIS MACHINE  
POWER MODE™  
The Power Mode™ process was developed by Lincoln  
to maintain a stable and smooth arc at low procedure  
settings which are needed to weld thin metal without  
pop-outs or burning-through. For Aluminum welding, it  
provides excellent control and the ability to maintain  
constant arc length. This results in improved welding  
performance in two primary types of applications.  
Start by setting the wire feed speed based upon mate-  
rial thickness and appropriate travel speed. Then  
adjust the Output knob as follows:  
• For steel, listen for the traditional “frying egg”  
sound of a good short-arc MIG procedure to know  
you have the process set correctly.  
• Short Arc MIG at low procedure settings.  
• Aluminum MIG welding.  
• For aluminum, simply adjust the Output knob until  
the desired arc length is obtained.  
Note the Volts display is simply a relative number and  
DOES NOT correspond to voltage.  
Power Mode™ is a method of high speed regulation of  
the output power whenever an arc is established. It  
provides a fast response to changes in the arc. The  
higher the Power Mode Setting, the longer the arc. If a  
welding procedure is not established, the best way to  
determine the Power Mode Setting is by experimenta-  
tion until the desired output result is established.  
Some procedure recommendations appear in the table  
below.  
In the Power Mode variables need to be set:  
• Wire Feed Speed  
• Output  
• Arc Control  
Setting up a Power Mode procedure is similar to set-  
ting a CV MIG procedure. Select a shielding gas  
appropriate for a short arc process.  
Recommended Welding Procedures for Power Mode  
Aluminum 4043  
E4043  
Aluminum 5356  
E5356  
Mild Steel  
L56  
Mild Steel  
L56  
Mild Steel  
L56  
Mild Steel  
L56  
Mild Steel  
L56  
Mild Steel  
L56  
Stainless Steel  
E308L  
Stainless Steel  
E308L  
MATERIAL  
WIRE  
WIRE SIZE  
GAS  
0.035  
0.035  
0.025  
0.025  
0.030  
0.030  
0.035  
0.035  
0.030  
0.035  
100% Ar.  
125 / 2.25  
100% Ar.  
125 / 1.75  
100% CO2  
Not Recommended  
75/25% Ar/CO2  
100 / 0.8  
100% CO2  
Not Recommended  
75/25% Ar/CO2  
90 / 1.0  
100% CO2  
75/25% Ar/CO2  
Tri-mix  
Tri-mix  
22 ga.  
20 ga.  
18 ga.  
16 ga.  
150 / 2.5  
200 / 3.75  
300 / 7.75  
150 / 2.3  
200 / 3.0  
300 / 6.85  
120 / 1.0  
140 / 1.7  
120 / 1.0  
140 / 1.5  
100 / 0.7  
110 / 1.5  
100 / 1.0  
110 / 1.5  
80 / 1.5  
110 / 2.0  
140 / 2.5  
50 / 0.5  
110 / 2.0  
130 / 2.7  
100 / 2.5  
125 / 3.0  
100 / 2.5  
125 / 3.0  
190 / 2.0  
260 / 3.0  
330 / 5.0  
190 / 2.0  
260 / 3.0  
330 / 4.5  
125 / 2.0  
160 / 2.3  
230 / 3.5  
300 / 6.0  
125 / 2.0  
160 / 2.3  
230 / 3.5  
300 / 6.0  
14 ga.  
12 ga.  
10 ga.  
400 / 9.0  
450 / 9.5  
400 / 7.5  
450 / 8.0  
160 / 3.8  
200 / 5.0  
240 / 6.5  
160 / 3.5  
200 / 4.5  
240 / 7.0  
210 / 3.0  
270 / 5.0  
325 / 6.5  
190 / 3.5  
230 / 6.0  
300 / 7.0  
500 / 10.0  
500 / 8.5  
600 / 9.5  
700 / 11  
3/16  
1/4  
600 / 11.25  
400 / 7.0  
400 / 7.5  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-12  
B-12  
OPERATION  
Pulsed MIG is an advanced form of welding that takes  
the best of all the other forms of transfer while minimiz-  
ing or eliminating their disadvantages. Unlike short cir-  
cuit, pulsed MIG does not create spatter or run the risk  
of cold lapping. The welding positions in pulsed MIG are  
not limited as they are with globular or spray and its wire  
use is definitely more efficient. Unlike the spray arc  
process, pulsing offers controlled heat input that allows  
better welding on thin materials, lower wire feed speeds  
and leads to less distortion and improved overall quality  
and appearance. This is especially important with stain-  
less, nickel and other alloys that are sensitive to heat  
input.  
PULSE WELDING (GMAW-P)  
The pulsed-arc process is, by definition, a spray trans-  
fer process wherein spray transfer occurs in pulses at  
regularly spaced intervals. In the time between pulses,  
the welding current is reduced and no metal transfer  
occurs.  
Pulsed-arc transfer is obtained by operating a power  
source between low and high current levels. The high  
current level or “pulse” forces an electrode drop to the  
workpiece. The low current level or “background” main-  
tains the arc between pulses. (See Figure below).  
In GMAW-P mode, arc control adjusts the background  
current and frequency of the wave. When arc control  
goes up, the frequency increases thus increasing the  
droplet transfer.  
EACH PULSE DELIVERS ONE DROPLET OF WELD MATERIAL  
FREQUENCY  
SPRAY TRANSITION  
CURRENT  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-13  
B-13  
OPERATION  
When Arc Control is used in the Pulse on Pulse modes,  
it does the same things it does in the other pulsed  
modes: decreasing the Arc Control decreases the  
droplet transfer and weld deposition rate. Increasing  
the Arc Control increases the droplet transfer and weld  
deposition rate. Since Arc Control varies weld droplet  
transfer rate, the Arc Control can be used to vary the  
ripple spacing in the weld bead.  
PULSE-ON-PULSE™ (GMAW-PP)  
Pulse on Pulse™ is a Lincoln process specifically  
designed for use in welding relatively thin (less than  
1/4" thick) aluminum (See the table below). It gives  
weld beads with very consistent uniform ripple.  
In Pulse on Pulse modes, two distinct pulse types are  
used, instead of the single pulse type normally used in  
GMAW-P. A number of high energy pulses are used to  
obtain spray transfer and transfer metal across the arc.  
Such pulses are shown in the figure below. After a  
number "N" of such pulses, depending on the wire feed  
speed used, an identical number "N" of low energy  
pulses are performed. These low energy pulses,  
shown in the figure below, do not transfer any filler  
metal across the arc and help to cool the arc and keep  
the heat input low.  
BENEFITS OF PULSE ON PULSE FROM  
LINCOLN ELECTRIC  
• Excellent appearance of the weld bead  
• Improved cleaning action  
• Reduced porosity  
Table B.2 shows WFS and Trim settings for common  
aluminum types and wire sizes when welding with  
Pulse-on-Pulse. The welds made to obtain the values  
in the table were fillet welds in the flat position. The val-  
ues in the table can be helpful as a starting point to  
establish a welding procedure. From there, adjust-  
ments need to be made to set the proper procedure for  
each specific application (out-of-position, other types  
of joints, etc.).  
"N" PULSES  
"N" PULSES  
HIGH HEAT  
PULSES  
LOW HEAT  
PULSES  
PEAK  
AMPS  
BACKGROUND  
AMPS  
TIME  
The Peak Current, Background Current, and  
Frequency are identical for the high energy and low  
energy pulses. In addition to cooling the weld down,  
the major effect of the low energy pulses is that they  
form a weld ripple. Since they occur at very regular  
time intervals, the weld bead obtained is very uniform  
with a very consistent ripple pattern. In fact, the bead  
has its best appearance if no oscillation of the welding  
gun ("whipping") is used.(See the figure below)  
The comments on the table below show values of WFS  
below which it is not recommended to weld. The rea-  
son is, that below these values the weld transfer will  
change from a spray arc to a short-arc, which is not  
advisable when welding aluminum.  
WELDING PROCEDURES FOR PULSE-ON-PULSE  
MATERIAL  
GAS  
Aluminum 4043  
100% Ar.  
E4043  
Aluminum 4043  
100% Ar.  
E4043  
Aluminum 5356  
100% Ar.  
E5356  
Aluminum 5356  
100% Ar.  
E5356  
WIRE  
WIRE SIZE  
0.035  
3/64  
0.035  
3/64  
14 ga.  
250 / 0  
400 / 0  
550 / 0  
600 / 0  
200 / 0  
280 / 0  
340 / 0  
400 / 0  
230 / 0  
425 / 0  
670 / 0  
700 / 0  
225 / 0  
400 / 0  
500 / 0  
550 / 0  
10 ga.  
3/16  
1/4  
Not Recommended  
below 200 WFS  
Not Recommended  
below 100 WFS  
Not Recommended  
below 200 WFS  
Not Recommended  
below 200 WFS  
COMMENTS  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-14  
B-14  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-1  
C-1  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
- ACCESSORIES SECTION -  
Accessories...........................................................................................................................Section C  
Cobramatic & Tig Module Connection Instructions...................................................................C-2  
Options/Accessories...................................................................................................................C-2  
Quick Disconnect Plugs .............................................................................................................C-3  
Connection of Lincoln Electric Wire Feeders............................................................C-4 Thru C-11  
V350-PRO/LN-25 with Optional 6 Pin K441-1 Remote.......................................................C-4  
V350-PRO/LN-25 with Optional 6 Pin K857 Remote ..........................................................C-5  
LN-25 with K431 Remote Option.........................................................................................C-6  
V350-PRO/LN-25 with K867 Adapter..................................................................................C-7  
V350-PRO/LN-7 with K480 Control Cable ..........................................................................C-8  
V350-PRO/LN-7 with K867 Adapter....................................................................................C-9  
V350-PRO/LN-742 .............................................................................................................C-10  
V350-PRO/LN-10 with K1505 Control Cable ....................................................................C-11  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-2  
C-2  
ACCESSORIES  
"CE" Version – K1728-3  
Cobramatic Connection Instructions  
A Cobramatic can only be used with a Factory or  
"CE" version of the V350  
• The "CE" version is the Factory version with the  
addition of power line filtering allowing the machine  
to comply with the European and Australian EMC  
emission requirements.  
1. Turn the Invertec power switch "off"  
2. Connect the control cable from the Cobramatic to  
the 24/42 VAC 14-pin wire feeder amphenol on  
the rear of the Invertec.  
Field Installed Options/Accessories  
3. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal  
of the polarity required by electrode. Connect the  
work lead to the other terminal.  
Two versions of the V350-Pro are available from the  
factory for both the CE and ROW versions.  
Options for K1728-1 Factory and K1728-3 "CE"  
V350’s  
4. Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the  
Invertec to coincide with wire feeder polarity used.  
• TIG Gas Control Kit – K1762-2  
• Advanced Process Panel – K1763-1  
Options for all models of V350-PRO  
5. If a remote control such as K857 is to be used  
with the Cobramatic, the remote can be connected  
directly to the 6pin amphenol on the front of the  
Invertec or use a K864 adapter to connect the  
cobramatic and the remote to the 24/42VAC 14-  
pin wire feeder amphenol connector on the rear of  
the Invertec.  
• Undercarriage – K1764-1  
• Valet Style Undercarriage - K1838-1  
Welding Cable Connectors:  
• K852-70 1/0-2/0 cable  
• K852-95 2/0-3/0 cable  
TIG Module K930-2  
The TIG Module connects to the V350-Pro Factory or  
CE versions with a K936-1 (9-14 pin) control cable.  
Connect the K936-1 to the 115VAC Wire Feeder  
Amphenol on the rear of the V350-Pro.  
FACTORY VERSION and  
ADVANCED PROCESS VERSION  
The TIG Module can also be used with the V350  
Construction version. A K936-4 control cable is  
required to supply 115VAC to the TIG Module from an  
external 115VAC supply.  
K857  
K814  
K812  
K870  
Remote Output Control  
Arc Start Switch  
Hand Operated Amptrol  
Foot Operated Amptrol  
General Instructions for Connection of Wire  
Feeders to V350-Pro  
Note: All of the above remote controls connect directly  
to the 6-pin MS-style connector, with either a K864 or  
K876 adapter and connect it to the 14 pin wire feeder  
MS-style connector. (See Diagram in Section F-1)  
Wire feeders other than LN-7 and LN-25 may be used  
provided that the auxiliary power supply capacity of  
the V350-Pro is not exceeded. K867 universal  
adapter plug is required. See connection diagram  
S19406 and S19386 at the back of this manual for  
more information.  
K930-[ ]  
TIG Module  
LN-25 *  
K428, K446, K449  
K617 (-1 or -2) K618 (-1 or -2)  
K440 (-1), K567-1  
K1559-1, K1564-1  
K1499-1, K1521-1  
K1587-1  
LN-742  
LN-7 GMA  
LN-10  
DH-10  
Remote Control of Invertec  
Remote Control K857, Hand Amptrol K963 and Foot  
Amptrol K870.  
Cobramatic  
*Not recommended for pulse welding  
OPTIONS / ACCESSORIES  
Construction Version – K1728-2  
• All welding modes for this model run with local out-  
put control and weld terminals ON (e.g. Stick, TIG,  
LN25 off the arc).  
K930-1  
TIG Module  
K428,K446, K449  
LN-25(Off the Arc)  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-3  
C-3  
ACCESSORIES  
QUICK DISCONNECT PLUGS  
A quick disconnect system is used for the welding  
cable connections. The K852-70 is designed to  
accept a welding cable size of 1/0 to 2/0.  
1. Remove 25mm (1 in.) of welding cable insulation.  
2. Slide rubber boot onto cable end. The boot end  
may be trimmed to match the cable diameter.  
Soap or other lubricant will help to slide the boot  
over the cable.  
BOOT  
WELDING CABLE  
25 mm  
TRIM  
1 in.  
3. Slide the copper tube into the brass plug.  
4. Insert cable into copper tube.  
SET SCREW  
BRASS PLUG  
COPPER TUBE  
5. Tighten set screw to collapse copper tube. Screw  
must apply pressure against welding cable. The  
top of the set screw will be well below the surface  
of the brass plug after tightening.  
6. Slide rubber boot over brass plug. The rubber  
boot must be positioned to completely cover all  
electrical surfaces after the plug is locked into the  
receptacle.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-4  
C-4  
ACCESSORIES  
CONNECTION OF LINCOLN ELEC-  
TRIC WIRE FEEDERS  
4. Set the voltmeter switch to the electrode polarity  
chosen.  
5. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.  
6. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position.  
7. Set “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” to the “ON”  
CAUTION  
CONNECTION OF THE LN-25 TO THE  
V350-PRO “ACROSS THE ARC” WITH  
OPTIONAL 6 PIN K441-1 REMOTE CON-  
TROL.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
position.  
2. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal  
of polarity required by the electrode. Connect the  
work lead to the other terminal. Welding cable  
must be sized for current and duty cycle of the  
application.  
If you are using an LN-25 without an internal con-  
tactor, the electrode will be “HOT” when the V350-  
PRO is energized.  
8. Set the “ARC CONTROL” to the “O” position and  
then adjust to suit.  
3. Attach the single lead from the LN-25 control box  
to the work using the spring clip on the end of the  
lead. This is only a control lead - it carries no  
welding current.  
Figure C.1 V350-PRO/LN-25 ACROSS THE ARC CONNECTION DIAGRAM  
6 pin  
Amphenol  
Optional K444-1  
Remote Control  
LN-25  
Wire Feeder  
+
-
Work Clip Lead  
To Work  
To Work  
Electrode Cable  
NOTE: Illustration shows electrode connected for negative polarity.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-5  
C-5  
ACCESSORIES  
5. Set the voltmeter switch to the electrode polarity  
chosen.  
CONNECTION OF THE LN-25 TO THE  
V350-PRO “ACROSS THE ARC” WITH  
OPTIONAL 6 PIN K857 REMOTE CON-  
TROL.  
6. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.  
7. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
8. Set “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” to the “ON”  
position.  
2. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal  
of polarity required by the electrode. Connect the  
work lead to the other terminal. Welding cable  
must be sized for current and duty cycle of the  
application.  
CAUTION  
If you are using an LN-25 without an internal con-  
tactor, the electrode will be “HOT” when the V350-  
PRO is energized.  
3. Connect the K857 remote control to the 6-pin  
amphenol on the V350-PRO.  
4. Attach the single lead from the LN-25 control box  
to the work using the spring clip on the end of the  
lead. This is only a control lead - it carries no  
welding current.  
9. Set the “ARC CONTROL” to the “O” position and  
then adjust to suit.  
Figure C.2 V350-PRO/LN-25 ACROSS THE ARC CONNECTION DIAGRAM WITH K857  
REMOTE CONTROL  
K857  
Remote Control  
6 pin  
Amphenol  
LN-25  
Wire Feeder  
+
-
Work Clip Lead  
To Work  
To Work  
Electrode Cable  
NOTE: Illustration shows electrode connected for negative polarity.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-6  
C-6  
ACCESSORIES  
6. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position.  
CONNECTION OF THE LN-25 WITH K431  
REMOTE OPTION TO THE V350-PRO.  
NOTE: AN LN-25 CAN ONLY BE USED WITH A FAC-  
TORY OR “CE” VERSION OF THE V350-PRO.  
7. Set “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” to the  
“REMOTE” position.  
8. Set the “ARC CONTROL” to the “O” position and  
then adjust to suit.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal  
of polarity required by the electrode. Connect the  
work lead to the other terminal. Welding cable  
must be sized for current and duty cycle of the  
application.  
9. Connect the K432 remote control cable to the LN-  
25.  
10. Connect the K876 adapter to the K432 and to the  
24/42VAC 14-pin amphenol located at the rear of  
the V350-PRO.  
3. Attach the single lead from the LN-25 control box  
to the work using the spring clip on the end of the  
lead. This is only a control lead - it carries no  
welding current.  
11. Adjust the wire feed speed and voltage at the LN-  
25.  
NOTE: See Figure C.4 for connection Using K867  
adapter.  
4. Set the voltmeter switch to the electrode polarity  
chosen.  
5. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.  
Figure C.3 LN-25 with K431 Remote Option to the V350-PRO  
ELECTRODE CABLE  
TO LN-25  
LN-25 WITH  
K431 OPTION  
6 PIN AMPHENOL  
14 PIN (24/42VAC)  
AMPHENOL  
TO  
WORK  
-
K876 ADAPTER  
K432 REMOTE  
CONTROL CABLE  
+
INVERTEC  
POWER SOURCE  
NOTE: Illustration shows electrode connected for positive polarity.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-7  
C-7  
ACCESSORIES  
CONNECTION OF THE K867 ADAPTER  
FOR USE WITH LN-25 WITH K431  
OPTION/V350-PRO.  
1. Insulate each unused lead individually.  
2. Remove 6 pin plug from K432 cable in order to  
connect K867 adapter.  
3. Label each lead (A thru F) as they are removed  
from the 6 pin plug.  
4. Splice leads and insulate.  
Figure C.4 Connection of LN-25 to V350-PRO using K867 adapter.  
21  
82  
81  
42  
41  
GND  
31  
32  
2
4
SPARE  
75  
76  
77  
ELECTRODE CABLE  
TO LN-25  
1
LN-25 WITH  
K431 OPTION  
14 PIN  
(24/42VAC)  
AMPHENOL  
TO  
WORK  
E
F
D
A
B
C
-
K432 REMOTE  
CONTROL CABLE  
+
K867 ADAPTER  
INVERTEC  
POWER SOURCE  
4
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-8  
C-8  
ACCESSORIES  
3. Connect the input cable from the K480 control  
cable to the (115VAC) 14 pin amphenol on the  
V350-PRO and the input cable plug on the LN-7.  
CONNECTION OF THE LN-7 TO THE V350-  
PRO USING K480 CONTROL CABLE (SEE  
FIGURE C.5)  
NOTE: AN LN-7 CAN ONLY BE USED WITH A FAC-  
TORY OR “CE” VERSION OF THE V350-PRO. IF  
YOUR LN-7 COMES EQUIPPED WITH A K291 OR  
K404 INPUT CABLE, REFER TO THE CONNECTION  
OF THE LN-7 USING K867 UNIVERSAL ADAPTER.  
4. Set the “VOLTMETER” switch to “+” or “-”  
depending on the polarity chosen.  
5. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.  
6. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
7. Place the “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” in the  
“REMOTE” position.  
2. Connect the electrode cable from the K480 control  
cable to the “+” terminal of the welder and to the  
LN-7 wire feeder. Connect the work cable to the  
“-” terminal of the welder.  
8. Adjust wire feed speed at the LN-7 and adjust the  
welding voltage with the optional remote control if  
used.  
NOTE: Figure C.5 shows the electrode connected  
for positive polarity. To change polarity, shut the  
welder off and reverse the electrode and work  
cables at the output terminals.  
9. Set the “ARC” control at “0” initially and adjust to  
suit.  
NOTE: Welding cable must be sized for current  
and duty cycle of application.  
Figure C.5 V350-PRO/LN-7 with K480 Control Cable Connection Diagram  
TO LN-7 INPUT  
14 PIN  
AMPHENOL  
(115VAC)  
AT REAR OF  
MACHINE  
CABLE PLUG  
OPTIONAL K857  
REMOTE CONTROL  
-
+
K480 CONTROL CABLE  
6 PIN  
AMPHENOL  
ELECTRODE CABLE  
TO WIRE FEED UNIT  
TO WORK  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-9  
C-9  
ACCESSORIES  
CONNECTION OF THE K867 ADAPTER  
FOR USE WITH THE K291 OR K404 INPUT  
CABLES AND LN-7.  
1. Insulate each unused lead individually.  
2. Splice leads and insulate.  
Figure C.6 Connection of LN-7 to V350-PRO using K867 adapter.  
SPARE  
82  
81  
42  
41  
LN-7  
CONTROL  
BOX  
ELECTRODE CABLE  
TO LN-7  
1
14 PIN(115VAC)  
AMPHENOL  
TO  
WORK  
31  
32  
2
31  
32  
2
-
4
4
21  
GND  
21  
GND  
K291 OR K404  
INPUT CABLE  
+
K867 UNIVERSAL  
ADAPTER PLUG  
GREEN  
INVERTEC  
POWER SOURCE  
75  
76  
77  
75  
76  
77  
K775 OPTIONAL  
REMOTE CONTROL  
2
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-10  
C-10  
ACCESSORIES  
3. Connect the K591 control cable to the 24/42VAC  
14 pin amphenol on the back of the V350-PRO  
and the input cable plug on the LN-742.  
CONNECTION OF THE LN-742 TO THE  
V350-PRO (SEE FIGURE C.7)  
NOTE: AN LN-7 CAN ONLY BE USED WITH A FAC-  
TORY OR “CE” VERSION OF THE V350-PRO.  
4. Set the “VOLTMETER” switch to “+” or “-”  
depending on the polarity chosen.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
5. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position..  
6. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “LOCAL”.  
2. Connect the electrode cable from the LN-742 to  
the “+” terminal of the welder. Connect the work  
cable to the “-” terminal of the welder.  
7. Place the “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” in the  
“REMOTE” position.  
NOTE: Figure C.7 shows the electrode connected  
for positive polarity. To change polarity, shut the  
welder off and reverse the electrode and work  
cables at the output terminals.  
8. Adjust wire feed speed at the LN-742.  
9. Set the “ARC” control at “0” initially and adjust to  
suit.  
NOTE: Welding cable must be sized for current  
and duty cycle of application.  
Figure C.7 V350-PRO/LN-742 Connection Diagram  
TO LN-742 INPUT  
CABLE PLUG  
14 PIN  
AMPHENOL  
(24/42VAC)  
AT REAR OF  
MACHINE  
+
-
K591 CONTROL CABLE  
ELECTRODE CABLE  
TO WIRE FEED UNIT  
TO WORK  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-11  
C-11  
ACCESSORIES  
CONNECTION OF THE LN-10 TO THE  
V350-PRO USING THE K1505 CONTROL  
CABLE.  
8. Set the “ARC CONTROL” to the “0” position and  
then adjust to suit.  
NOTE: AN LN-10 CAN ONLY BE USED WITH A FAC-  
TORY OR “CE” VERSION OF THE V350-PRO.  
9. Set wire feed speed and voltage at the LN-10.  
NOTE: The voltage set point displayed on the  
V350-PRO should be ignored when operating in  
the remote control mode with the LN-10.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Connect the K1505 control cable from the LN-10  
to the Invertec 24/42VAC 14 pin amphenol con-  
necter on the rear of the V350-PRO.  
10. See the LN-10 manual for details on accessing  
the control DIP switch.  
11. The control DIP switch inside the LN-10 should be  
set per the instructions in the LN-10 manual.  
3. Connect the electrode cable to the output terminal  
of polarity required by the electrode. Connect the  
work lead to the other terminal.  
4. Set the meter polarity switch on the front of the  
V350-PRO to coincide with wire feeder polarity  
used.  
5. Set “CONTROL SELECT” to “REMOTE”.  
6. Set the “MODE” to the “CV-WIRE” position..  
7. Set the “WELD TERMINALS SELECT” to the  
“REMOTE” position.  
Figure C.8 LN-10 V350-PRO  
TO LN-10  
14 PIN  
AMPHENOL  
(24/42VAC)  
AT REAR OF  
MACHINE  
+
-
K1505  
TO WORK  
ELECTRODE CABLE  
TO LN-10  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-12  
C-12  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section D-1  
Section D-1  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
-MAINTENANCE-  
Maintenance .........................................................................................................................Section D  
Capacitor Discharge Procedure .................................................................................................D-2  
Visual Inspection.........................................................................................................................D-2  
Routine Maintenance..................................................................................................................D-2  
Periodic Maintenance.................................................................................................................D-2  
Major Component Locations .....................................................................................................D-3  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-2  
D-2  
MAINTENANCE  
VISUAL INSPECTION  
WARNING  
Clean interior of machine with a low pressure air  
stream. Make a thorough inspection of all compo-  
nents. Look for signs of overheating, broken leads or  
other obvious problems. Many problems can be  
uncovered with a good visual inspection.  
Have qualified personnel do the maintenance  
work. Always use the greatest care when  
working near moving parts.  
Do not put your hands near the cooling blower  
fan. If a problem cannot be corrected by  
following the instructions, take the machine to  
the nearest Lincoln Field Service Shop.  
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE  
1. Every 6 months or so the machine should be  
cleaned with a low pressure airstream. Keeping  
the machine clean will result in cooler operation  
and higher reliability. Be sure to clean these  
areas:  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------  
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.  
• Do not touch electrically live parts or  
electrode with skin or wet clothing.  
• Insulate yourself from work and  
ground  
• All printed circuit boards  
• Power switch  
• Main transformer  
• Always wear dry insulating gloves.  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
EXPLODING PARTS can cause  
• Input rectifier  
• Auxiliary Transformer  
• Reconnect Switch Area  
• Fan (Blow air through the rear louvers)  
injury.  
Failed parts can explode or cause other  
parts to explode when power is applied.  
2. Examine the sheet metal case for dents or breakage.  
Repair the case as required. Keep the case in good  
condition to insure that high voltage parts are protected  
and correct spacings are maintained. All external sheet  
metal screws must be in place to insure case strength  
and electrical ground continuity.  
Always wear a face shield and long  
sleeves when servicing.  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
See additional warning information  
throughout this Operator’s Manual.  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE  
Overload Protection  
CAPACITOR DISCHARGE PROCEDURE  
The machine is electrically protected from producing  
high output currents. Should the output current  
exceed 430A, an electronic protection circuit will  
reduce the current to approximately 100A. The  
machine will continue to produce this low current until  
the protection circuit is reset. Reset occurs when the  
output load is removed.  
1. Obtain a power resistor (25 ohms, 25 watts).  
2. Hold resistor body with electrically insulated glove.  
DO NOT TOUCH TERMINALS. Connect the resis-  
tor terminals across the two studs in the position  
shown. Hold in each position for 1 second.  
Repeat for all four capacitors.  
RESISTOR  
Thermal Protection  
Thermostats protect the machine from excessive  
operating temperatures. Excessive temperatures may  
be caused by a lack of cooling air or operating the  
machine beyond the duty cycle and output rating. If  
excessive operating temperature should occur, the  
thermostat will prevent output voltage or current. The  
meter will remain energized during this time.  
CAPACITOR  
TERMINALS  
Thermostats are self-resetting once the machine  
cools sufficiently. If the thermostat shutdown was  
caused by excessive output or duty cycle and the fan  
is operating normally, the Power Switch may be left  
on and the reset should occur within a 15 minute peri-  
od.  
3. Use a DC voltmeter to check that voltage is not  
present across the terminals on all four capaci-  
tors.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-3  
D-3  
MAINTENANCE  
FIGURE D.1 – MAJOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS  
1. Center Panel  
2. Base Assembly  
3. Case Back  
4. Case Front  
5. Case Wraparound  
5
!
W
!
ARNING  
W
Lore  
re  
m
ARNING  
eli  
ipsum  
l
i
t
,
e
d
laoree  
e
d
s
u
m
d
o
l
Lo  
e
re  
rem ips  
m
diam  
utmdodlore  
dolor  
n
d
olo  
or  
e
a
m
m
a
n
g
o
n
n
a
elit,  
lit,  
i
s
ps  
on  
ummy it amet consectetuer adipi  
amet  
laoreet  
re  
rem ipsuet  
d
e
u
m
e
d
d
i
a
m
m
a
g
n
a
Lo  
d
i
a
m
n
o
n
u
dolor  
m
y
c
onsec  
ni  
bh  
liquam eraeuis  
elit,  
t, ed  
ed  
m
ip  
dolore magna lor  
re  
nonu  
s
a
a
h
a
met  
t
e
lao  
oree  
su  
m
m
a
g
n
a
m
m
y
n
i
b
c
u
a
m
e
r
a
s
m
o
d
tetu  
diam  
iam  
dolor  
olor  
nonummy  
s
i
t
er  
tinciduna  
et  
n
co  
ons  
ns  
liquam eraetuis ectetu  
d
Lorem  
d
a
ibh  
t
dip  
olore  
re  
on  
sit amet  
ummy am  
isc  
cing  
ng  
e
m
e
d
m
m
u
i
s
m
o
d
t
e
unt  
t
lit,  
ipsum  
onummy ni ag  
d
ut  
laoree ed diam  
re  
s
n
u
et  
e
er  
mod tinctiudeunt ut  
diam  
et dolor  
m
n
consectertuaet  
euism  
a
d
n
a
a
l
i
q
ibh  
b
r
tincidunt dipiscing  
iscing  
!
olor  
h
Lore  
em ip  
ipsum do  
sum  
dolo  
no  
re magn  
liq  
ua  
sit  
et  
ue  
r
n
u
i
t
a
m
e
m
u
t
el  
eli  
m
a
a
mmy  
met conse  
t
erat  
rat  
od  
t
ad  
tincidunt di  
i
t
,
e
d
A
TTENTION  
lao  
ed  
agna aliquam  
n
Lo  
ibh  
consec  
pis  
idunt ut scing  
re  
m
et  
ipsu  
iam  
reet dolodreiam  
do  
h
e
e
ng  
ut  
!
elit,  
t,  
e
e
d
d
olo  
d
m
n
lor sit  
r
a
liqu  
uis  
mod  
sm  
od  
onummy  
sit  
am  
tetu  
ctet  
uer  
tincid  
id  
AV  
PRECAUCION  
rem ipsum  
laore  
oree  
sum  
n
re  
diam  
diam  
m
olor agna aliq  
amet  
erat  
at  
d
a
dipiscing  
pis  
cing  
et  
y
conse  
ect  
dolore ma  
non  
nibh  
on  
s
olo  
nummy  
r
sit  
a
e
ua  
ame  
uliisq  
ua  
m
ib  
h
un  
Lo  
rem  
re  
n
i
i
t
b
a
h
m
od  
t
incidun  
e
t
ut  
ctetuer  
uer  
t
ut  
I
SO DE  
mag  
u
i
s
m
o
d
e
t
t
eli  
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amlit,  
laor  
m
ree  
laoree,t edoloreipmagna aliqua et  
ed diam nonumm  
et  
c
m
a
Lor  
i
p
s
u
m
d
o
l
o
gna  
a
n
conseerat  
sec at  
uismo ctet  
od  
tin  
o
ed  
d
aliquamibh  
liquam era  
tin  
adipisc  
di  
piscing  
elit, re  
lit  
d
e
t
cid  
dunt  
el  
lit,  
laoree ed  
m
ipsum  
i
a
m
d
o
te  
tuer  
er  
m
lo  
r
ing  
aor  
su  
dolore  
dol  
or  
n
s
i
e
t
ut  
Lo  
rem  
elit, ed ia  
t,  
d
iam  
m
Lorem  
elit, rem  
d
d
onummy  
magn ummy nib  
s
n
i
t
b
a
h
h
rat  
d
ad  
eet  
d
olore mano  
dolor  
dol  
no  
lor  
ipsum do  
nummy i  
na mmy amet  
nibh eui  
e
m
d
nonu lor  
e
tinc  
ip  
t
d
m
t
e
ia  
m
met co  
c
onsec  
idun  
iscing  
ing  
r
sit  
t
elit,  
t
d
m
agna  
e
d
o
laoreet dolore ma  
s
u
e
l
ip  
ps  
o
reet dolore um re  
a
al  
al  
t
u
oreet  
d
g
m
magna  
gneu  
nibh  
ao  
oree  
ed  
d
di  
s
lo  
d
nonumm  
olo  
m
sit  
iqu  
eu  
am erat ismod tin tu  
c
t
u
e
r
a
d
i
Lor  
re  
m
ia  
dolore  
m
y
n
conse  
onsec  
m
m
t
e
a
iam  
dolo  
ol  
a
eli  
it,  
ipsum  
r
s
aliqu ibh  
liquam  
t
a
m
me  
y nibh et  
er  
a
e
ed  
it  
e
d
g
r sit am  
a
magna aliqua ame  
uismod  
ctetue  
am er smo  
tu  
er  
ol  
nonumm  
o
n
t
dip  
cidunt utpi  
dun  
Lolaro  
or  
on  
magna  
a
et  
a
consectetue  
on  
inc  
r
o
em  
r
e
i
p
s
u
d
do  
t
e
u
ib  
h
e
isc  
cing  
g
elit  
lit,  
et  
ipsum  
d
iam  
olor  
r
consec  
r
tetue  
e
d
tinc  
a
a
m
liq  
e
s
uismo  
,
d
a
ib  
h
at  
nc  
dipiscing  
a
m
y
m
u
a
e
d
c
t
ut  
laoree  
ree  
ed diam nonloure manoonnuummmy  
sit  
liq  
uam  
e
idunt ut scin  
un  
g
gn  
e
m
e
r
a
t
te  
dia  
m
r
d
e
m
amet  
et  
te  
uismod tinci  
a
a
n
t
c
c
o
e
m
nsectetuer  
tuer  
r
t
m
oloagna alimq y ni  
or sit  
c
m
e
erat  
tuer  
r
t
u
t
a
l
i
q
u
a
i
b
h
o
d
Lore  
re  
e
olor  
dol  
n
onummy  
n
a
a
amet  
nib  
c
t
liq  
h
tinc  
n
a
ore  
e
n
i
e
c
a
t
i
n
c
i
d
u
d
eeu  
a
dipiscing  
ipi  
elit,  
m
ipsum dolor sit ame  
psum  
t
euismo  
bh euismon  
o
s
d
e
i
p
i
s
c
i
n
g
ua  
u
li  
h
dunt  
ism  
cte  
erat mod tin  
tu  
rat  
cid  
idu  
magna mm  
gn  
m
e
t
qu  
u
a
ctetu  
etu  
nt  
u
u
ng  
m
co  
u
s
nt ut ci  
laoreet dolore mag  
d
d
y
n
c
ibh eui ons  
m
ercat  
rat  
cte  
er  
adipisc  
o
er  
oree  
rem ips  
m ipsum olo  
a
e
t
d
t
u
ng  
Lo  
dol  
nonumm  
aliq  
a
h
ti  
ncidunt ipiscing  
tin  
c
adip  
ipis  
un  
t
t
d
m
o
y
r
s
n
i
b
h
e
u
iq  
eu  
u
a
m
e
r
a
t
i
s
m
o
d
e
id  
unt  
idunt iscing  
t
elit  
it,  
re  
nu  
magn mmy nib  
it  
t
u
e
r
in  
g
c
ut in  
t
laor  
oreet dolodre mag  
eet  
iam nonu  
ed  
um  
d
d
a
h
me  
rat  
r
tincidunt udtipiscing  
idunt ut  
ad  
ut  
t
g
d
n
a
a
l
t
co  
olor  
sit  
onummy it  
a
olo  
re  
n
r
aliquam era  
nsecte  
iqu  
e ectetu  
uismod  
Lorem  
re  
m
agn  
mmy ame  
et  
nibh  
a
am  
t
tuer  
o
Lore  
re  
e
e
eli  
lao it,  
laore  
m
e
reet d diam  
m
ipsum  
adipipiscindg  
ed  
na  
cons  
rat  
t
tinc  
cid  
unt  
r
adipiscing  
ipiscing  
d
ipsum dolor sit amet consecteteulit  
er  
,
e
d
a
aliquamib  
e
h
r
e
se  
la  
m
u
m
d
o
l
o
r
euismodect  
u
Lo  
s
u
Loare  
o
reeip  
dia  
uism  
tetue  
orem ipsum  
d
m
iam  
m
a
m
era  
at  
el  
lit  
laoree, ed ip  
re  
et  
ia  
d
elit,  
,
e
e
m
t
d
o
nonum  
nonu  
o
m
lo  
y
r
si  
s
n
i
b
h
e
u
i
s
mo  
od  
er adipiscing  
tinciduntaudtip  
is  
t
m
do  
su lore  
m
m
o
ipsu  
l
non lor  
on  
um  
agna m  
n
ao  
la  
reet  
et  
d
dia  
diam  
m
m
m
doma  
i
t
a
m
e
a
d
a
h
me  
mmy nib eui  
o
d
s
cin  
g
re  
diam  
ia  
m
m
e
it  
n
l
a
et  
dolormsit  
m
am  
gibh euiysmnio  
dolor  
or  
t
incidunt  
co  
n
o
r
s
i
n
t
b
a
a
t
co  
ns  
ec  
u
t
t
dolo  
ol  
a
onummy  
t mmaaggnna  
n
i
i
t
h
m
nonumlomy  
n
na  
b
ib  
d
h
t
e
u
e
m
y
n
i
b
amal  
iquam  
h
e
e
u
ismod  
t
tetue  
ue  
r
o
o
re mag  
r
s
t
al  
iqu  
met coanmse  
t
co  
nsec  
sm  
ons  
at  
ra  
m
um  
it  
a
h
e
n
a
e
e
r
c
o
eui  
u
s
aliquam  
liquam  
d
tincidu adipiscing  
tincid  
ag  
na  
m
ec  
te  
tuer  
e
eu  
ismod tetu  
uer adipisciun  
t
y
e
t
c
ism  
erat  
a
ni  
in  
g
aliquambherat  
iq  
ua  
o
ns  
a
od  
d
erat  
t
ut  
eu  
e
t
ttiinc  
a
nc  
d
idunt ipi  
tinci dipiscing  
cid  
un  
du  
t
ng  
t
cte  
te  
m
is  
mo  
e
tuue  
r
u
adipiscing  
di  
s
cin  
ut  
t
ra  
d
er  
n
t
u
ut  
t
t
t
in  
a
g
c
p
idu  
is  
n
ci  
ut ng  
t
3
4
A A  
M
PS  
V V  
OL  
TS  
1
A
C
C
T
C
OUTPU  
T
-S  
-S  
T
IC  
IC  
K
W
E
7
6
C
0
LD  
1
1
T
8
TE  
K
IG  
R
M
0
G
0
IN  
T
A
A
W
C
LS  
V
-W  
IR  
E
C
V
-F  
HO  
L
S
E
U
X
T
C
ST  
AR  
LE  
O
C
T
R
E
D
4
T
5
3
S
E
L
6
E
C
ARC  
C
T
2
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
ONTR  
7
1
OL  
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
R
E
M
O
+2  
-6  
9
10  
T
E
+4  
-8  
+6  
+8  
-10  
SOFT  
+10  
CRISP  
P
O
W
E
R
O
N
2
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-4  
D-4  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section E-1  
Section E-1  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
-THEORY OF OPERATION SECTION-  
Theory of Operation .............................................................................................................Section E  
General Description ....................................................................................................................E-2  
Input Line Voltage, Auxiliary Transformer and Precharge...........................................................E-2  
Switch Board and Main Transformer ..........................................................................................E-3  
Power board, Control Board, and SPI Communications............................................................E-4  
Output Rectifier and Choke........................................................................................................E-5  
Thermal Protection .....................................................................................................................E-6  
Protection Circuits ......................................................................................................................E-6  
Over current Protection ........................................................................................................E-6  
Under/Over Voltage Protection ............................................................................................E-6  
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) Operation ...................................................................E-7  
Pulse Width Modulation..............................................................................................................E-8  
Minimum/Maximum Output..................................................................................................E-8  
FIGURE E.1 – V350-PRO BLOCK LOGIC DIAGRAM  
To Control  
Board  
Main Switch Board  
Positive  
Output  
Terminal  
Input  
Rectifier  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Input switch  
Choke  
Negative  
Output  
Terminal  
Reconnect  
Switch  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Fan  
Primary Current Feedback  
Input Relay Control  
115VAC Fan Supply  
Soft Start Control  
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)  
Auxiliary  
Transformer  
115VAC, 42VAC  
24VAC  
Machine Control Supply  
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC  
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC  
RS232 Supply +5VDC  
Power  
Board  
Control Board  
28VAC  
40VDC  
14 Pin  
RS232  
Amphenol  
SPI Communications & +15VDC, +5VDC Supply  
Advanced  
Process  
Panel  
Mode  
Panel  
Remote Control & Trigger  
Remote  
Board  
Display  
Panel  
(Not used if APP  
is in place)  
6 Pin  
Amphenol  
Output  
Control  
Weld  
Terminals  
Optional Solenoid  
Output  
Potentiometer  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-2  
E-2  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
FIGURE E.2 – INPUT VOLTAGE AND PRECHARGE  
Main Switch Board  
To Control  
Board  
Positive  
Output  
Terminal  
Input  
Rectifier  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Input switch  
Choke  
Negative  
Output  
Terminal  
Reconnect  
Switch  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Fan  
Primary Current Feedback  
115VAC Fan Supply  
Input Relay Control  
Soft Start Control  
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)  
Auxiliary  
Transformer  
115VAC, 42VAC  
24VAC  
Machine Control Supply  
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC  
Power  
Board  
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC  
RS232 Supply +5VDC  
Control Board  
28VAC  
40VDC  
14 Pin  
Amphenol  
RS232  
SPI Communications & +15VDC, +5VDC Supply  
Advanced  
Process  
Panel  
Mode  
Panel  
Remote Control & Trigger  
Remote  
Board  
Display  
Panel  
(Not used if APP  
is in place)  
6 Pin  
Amphenol  
Output  
Control  
Output  
Potentiometer  
Weld  
Terminals  
Optional Solenoid  
is rectified and the resultant 40VDC is applied to the  
power board.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The Invertec V350-Pro is an inverter based welding  
power source that offers multi mode constant voltage  
(CV) and constant current (CC) welding and is rated at  
350 amps 34VDC at a 60% duty cycle. The Invertec  
V350-Pro is available in a construction version (no wire  
feeder connection or auxiliary power ), a factory ver-  
sion that includes a wire feeder connection and relat-  
ed power, an advanced process version and a rack  
version.  
The input voltage is rectified by the input rectifier and  
the resultant DC voltage is applied to the switch board  
through the reconnect switch assembly located at the  
rear of the machine. The reconnect switch connect the  
two pairs of input capacitors either in a parallel (lower  
voltage) or series (higher voltage) configuration to  
accommodate the applied input voltage.  
During the precharge time the DC input voltage is  
applied to the input capacitors through a current limit-  
ing circuit. The input capacitors are charged slowly  
and current limited. A voltage to frequency converter  
circuit located on the switch board monitors the  
capacitor voltages. This signal is coupled to the con-  
trol board (measure frequency, not voltage to check  
signal). When the input capacitors have charged to an  
acceptable level, the control board energizes the input  
relays, that are located on the switch board, making all  
of the input power, without current limiting, available  
to the input capacitors. If the capacitors become  
under or over voltage the control board will de-ener-  
gize the input relays and the V350 output will be dis-  
abled. Other possible faults may also cause the input  
relays to drop out.  
INPUT LINE VOLTAGE, AUXILIARY  
TRANSFORMER, & PRECHARGE  
The Invertec V350-Pro can be connected for a variety  
of three-phase or single-phase input voltages. The ini-  
tial power is applied to the V350 through a line switch  
located on the front of the machine. Two phases of the  
input voltage are applied to the auxiliary transformer.  
The auxiliary transformer develops four different sec-  
ondary voltages. The 115VAC is used to power the fan  
motor and also is applied to the 14 pin amphenol type  
connector for wirefeeder operation. The 24VAC and  
42VAC voltages are also applied to the 14 pin amphe-  
nol type connector to power wirefeeders. The 28VAC  
NOTE: Unshaded areas of Block Logic Diagram are the subject of discussion.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-3  
E-3  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
FIGURE E.3 – SWITCH BOARD & MAIN TRANSFORMER  
Main Switch Board  
Board  
Positive  
Output  
Terminal  
Input  
Rectifier  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Input switch  
Choke  
Negative  
Output  
Terminal  
Reconnect  
Switch  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Fan  
Primary Current Feedback  
Input Relay Control  
115VAC Fan Supply  
Soft Start Control  
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)  
Auxiliary  
Transformer  
115VAC, 42VAC  
24VAC  
Machine Control Supply  
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC  
Power  
Board  
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC  
RS232 Supply +5VDC  
Control Board  
28VAC  
40VDC  
14 Pin  
Amphenol  
RS232  
SPI Communications & +15VDC, +5VDC Supply  
Advanced  
Process  
Panel  
Mode  
Panel  
(Not used if APP  
is in place)  
Remote Control & Trigger  
Remote  
Board  
Display  
Panel  
6 Pin  
Amphenol  
Output  
Control  
Output  
Potentiometer  
Weld  
Terminals  
Optional Solenoid  
main transformer. The reverse directions of current  
flow through the main transformer primaries and the  
offset timing of the IGBT switching circuits induce an  
AC square wave output signal at the secondary of the  
main transformer. The two current transformers (CT)  
located on the switch board monitor these primary  
currents. If the primary currents become abnormally  
high the control board will shut off the IGBTs, thus dis-  
abling the machine output. The DC current flow  
through each primary winding is clamped back to  
each respective input capacitor when the IGBTs are  
turned off. This is needed due to the inductance of the  
transformer primary winding. The firing of the two  
switch boards occurs during halves of a 50 microsec-  
ond interval, creating a constant 20 KHZ output. In  
some low open circuit Tig modes the firing frequency  
is reduced to 5KHZ.  
SWITCH BOARD &  
MAIN TRANSFORMER  
There is one switch board in the Invertec V350-Pro.  
This board incorporates two pairs of input capacitors,  
two insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) switching  
circuits, a fan motor drive circuit, and a voltage/fre-  
quency capacitor feedback circuit. The two capaci-  
tors in a pair are always in series with each other.  
When the reconnect switch is in the lower voltage  
position the capacitor pairs are in parallel . Thus two  
series capacitors in parallel with two series capacitors.  
When the reconnect switch is in the high voltage posi-  
tion the two capacitor pairs are in series. Thus four  
capacitors in series. This is required to accommodate  
the higher input voltages.  
When the input capacitors are fully charged they act  
as power supplies for the IGBT switching circuits.  
When welding output is required the Insulated Gate  
Bipolar Transistors switch the DC power from the input  
capacitors, "on and off" thus supplying a pulsed DC  
current to the main transformer primary windings. See  
IGBT Operation Discussion and Diagrams in this  
section. Each IGBT switching circuit feeds current to  
a separate, oppositely wound primary winding in the  
The Invertec V350-Pro has a F.A.N. fan as needed cir-  
cuit. The fan operates when the welding output ter-  
minals are energized or when a thermal over tempera-  
ture condition exists. Once the fan is activated it will  
remain on for a minimum of five minutes. The fan dri-  
ver circuit is housed on the switch board but it is acti-  
vated from a control board signal.  
NOTE: Unshaded areas of Block Logic Diagram are the subject of discussion.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-4  
E-4  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
FIGURE E.4 – POWER BOARD, CONTROL BOARD  
AND SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) COMMUNICATIONS  
To Control  
Main Switch Board  
Board  
Positive  
Output  
Terminal  
Input  
Rectifier  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Input switch  
Choke  
Negative  
Output  
Terminal  
Reconnect  
Switch  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Fan  
Primary Current Feedback  
Input Relay Control  
115VAC Fan Supply  
Soft Start Control  
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)  
Auxiliary  
Transformer  
115VAC, 42VAC  
24VAC  
Machine Control Supply  
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC  
Power  
Board  
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC  
RS232 Supply +5VDC  
Control Board  
28VAC  
40VDC  
14 Pin  
Amphenol  
RS232  
SPI Communications & +15VDC, +5VDC Supply  
Advanced  
Process  
Panel  
Mode  
Panel  
Remote Control & Trigger  
Remote  
Board  
Display  
Panel  
(Not used if APP  
is in place)  
6 Pin  
Amphenol  
Output  
Control  
Output  
Potentiometer  
Weld  
Terminals  
Optional Solenoid  
the V350 machine. The control board sends and  
receives command signals from the mode or advanced  
process panel, the display panel and the remote panel.  
These communications are processed through a digi-  
tal network called a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI).  
This network digitally communicates to and from the  
control board the user’s commands and various  
machine status messages. The software that is con-  
tained within the control board processes and com-  
pares these commands with the voltage and current  
feedback information it receives from the output cur-  
rent sensor and the output voltage sensing leads. The  
appropriate pulse width modulation (PWM) signals  
(See Pulse Width Modulation in this section) are sent  
to the switch board IGBTs. In this manner, the digital-  
ly controlled high-speed welding waveform is created  
and regulated.  
POWER BOARD, CONTROL BOARD  
AND SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTER-  
FACE (SPI) COMMUNICATIONS  
POWER BOARD  
The 28VAC auxiliary is rectified and filtered and applied  
to the power board. The power board, utilizing a  
switching power supply, processes the 40VDC input  
and develops several regulated positive and negative  
DC supplies. Three DC supplies are fed to the control  
board for machine control supplies. Two positive DC  
voltages are coupled to the control board for the Serial  
Peripheral Communications (SPI) supplies. A +5VDC  
is used for the RS232 connection supply. An over or  
under input voltage detection and shutdown circuit is  
also part of the power board’s circuitry. The optional  
12VDC gas solenoid is powered by the remote board.  
The control board also monitors the thermostats, the  
main transformer primary currents and the input  
capacitor voltages.  
CONTROL BOARD  
The control board performs the primary interfacing  
functions to establish and maintain output control of  
NOTE: Unshaded areas of Block Logic Diagram are the subject of discussion.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-5  
E-5  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
FIGURE E.5 – OUTPUT RECTIFIER AND CHOKE  
To Control  
Board  
Main Switch Board  
Positive  
Output  
Terminal  
Input  
Rectifier  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Input switch  
Choke  
Negative  
Output  
Terminal  
Reconnect  
Switch  
Primary  
Current  
Sensor  
Fan  
Primary Current Feedback  
115VAC Fan Supply  
Input Relay Control  
Soft Start Control  
V/F Capacitor Feedback (2)  
Auxiliary  
Transformer  
115VAC, 42VAC  
24VAC  
Machine Control Supply  
+15VDC, -15VDC, +5VDC  
Power  
Board  
SPI Supply +15VDC +5VDC  
RS232 Supply +5VDC  
Control Board  
28VAC  
40VDC  
14 Pin  
Amphenol  
RS232  
SPI Communications & +15VDC, +5VDC Supply  
Advanced  
Process  
Panel  
Mode  
Panel  
Remote Control & Trigger  
Remote  
Board  
Display  
Panel  
(Not used if APP  
is in place)  
6 Pin  
Amphenol  
Output  
Control  
Output  
Potentiometer  
Weld  
Terminals  
Optional Solenoid  
OUTPUT RECTIFIER AND CHOKE  
The output rectifier receives the AC output from the  
main transformer secondary and rectifies it to a DC  
voltage level. Since the output choke is in series with  
the negative leg of the output rectifier and also in  
series with the welding load, a filtered DC output is  
applied to the machine’s output terminals.  
NOTE: Unshaded areas of Block Logic Diagram are the subject of discussion.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-6  
E-6  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
OVER CURRENT  
PROTECTION  
THERMAL PROTECTION  
Two normally closed (NC) thermostats protect the  
machine from excessive operating temperatures.  
These thermostats are wired in series and are con-  
nected to the control board. One of the thermostats is  
located on the heat sink of the switch board and the  
other is located on the output choke. Excessive tem-  
peratures may be caused by a lack of cooling air or  
operating the machine beyond its duty cycle or output  
rating. If excessive operating temperatures should  
occur, the thermostats will prevent output from the  
machine. The yellow thermal light, located on the front  
of the machine, will be illuminated. The thermostats  
are self-resetting once the machine cools sufficiently.  
If the thermostat shutdown was caused by excessive  
output or duty cycle and the fan is operating normally,  
the power switch may be left on and the reset should  
occur within a 15-minute period.  
If the average current exceeds 450 amps for one sec-  
ond, then the output will be limited to 100 amps until  
the load is removed. If the peak current exceeds 600  
amps for 150 ms, the output will be limited to 100  
amps until the load is removed.  
UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION  
Protective circuits are included on the switch and con-  
trol boards to monitor the voltage across the input  
capacitors. In the event that a capacitor pair voltage  
is too high, or too low, the machine output will be dis-  
abled. The protection circuits will prevent output if any  
of the following conditions exist.  
1. Voltage across a capacitor pair exceeds 467  
volts. (High line surges or improper input voltage  
connections.)  
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS  
Protective circuits are designed into the V350-PRO to  
sense trouble and shut down the machine before  
damage occurs to the machine's internal components.  
2. Voltage across a capacitor pair is under 190 volts.  
(Due to improper input voltage connections.)  
3. Internal component damage.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-7  
E-7  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
capable of conducting current. A voltage supply con-  
nected to the drain terminal will allow the IGBT to con-  
duct and supply current to the circuit components  
coupled to the source. Current will flow through the  
conducting IGBT to downstream components as long  
as the positive gate signal is present. This is similar to  
turning ON a light switch.  
INSULATED GATE BIPOLAR  
TRANSISTOR (IGBT)  
OPERATION  
An IGBT is a type of transistor. IGBT are semiconduc-  
tors well suited for high frequency switching and high  
current applications.  
Example A in Figure E.6 shows an IGBT in passive  
mode. There is no gate signal, zero volts relative to the  
source, and therefore, no current flow. The drain ter-  
minal of the IGBT may be connected to a voltage sup-  
ply; but since there is no conduction, the circuit will not  
supply current to components connected to the  
source. The circuit is turned OFF like a light switch.  
Example B shows the IGBT in an active mode. When  
the gate signal , a positive DC voltage relative to the  
source, is applied to the gate terminal of the IGBT, it is  
FIGURE E.6 – IGBT  
POSITIVE  
VOLTAGE  
APPLIED  
GATE  
GATE  
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
n +  
n +  
n +  
n +  
p
BODY REGION  
p
BODY REGION  
DRAIN DRIFT REGION  
DRAIN DRIFT REGION  
n -  
n -  
n +  
p +  
BUFFER LAYER  
n +  
p +  
BUFFER LAYER  
INJECTING LAYER  
INJECTING LAYER  
DRAIN  
DRAIN  
B. ACTIVE  
A. PASSIVE  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-8  
E-8  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
FIGURE E.7 — TYPICAL IGBT OUTPUTS.  
sec  
48  
sec  
sec  
sec  
50  
MINIMUM OUTPUT  
sec  
24  
sec  
sec  
24  
2
sec  
50  
MAXIMUM OUTPUT  
MAXIMUM OUTPUT  
PULSE WIDTH  
MODULATION  
By holding the gate signal on for 24 microseconds  
each, and allowing only two microseconds of dwell  
time (off time) during the 50-microsecond cycle, the  
output is maximized. The darkened area under the top  
curve can be compared to the area under the bottom  
curve. The more dark area that is under the curve indi-  
cates that more power is present.  
The term Pulse Width Modulation is used to describe  
how much time is devoted to conduction in the posi-  
tive and negative portions of the cycle. Changing the  
pulse width is known as modulation. Pulse Width  
Modulation (PWM) is the varying of the pulse width  
over the allowed range of a cycle to affect the output  
of the machine.  
1
An IGBT group consists of two IGBT  
modules feeding one transformer primary  
winding.  
MINIMUM OUTPUT  
By controlling the duration of the gate signal, the IGBT  
is turned on and off for different durations during the  
cycle. The top drawing in Figure E.7 shows the mini-  
mum output signal possible over a 50-microsecond  
time period.  
The positive portion of the signal represents one IGBT  
1
group conducting for one microsecond. The negative  
1
portion is the other IGBT group . The dwell time (off  
time) is 48 microseconds (both IGBT groups off). Since  
only two microseconds of the 50-microsecond time  
period is devoted to conducting, the output power is  
minimized.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section F-1  
Section F-1  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR SECTION  
Troubleshooting & Repair Section.................................................................................Section F  
How to Use Troubleshooting Guide ....................................................................................F-2  
PC Board Troubleshooting Procedures and Replacement .................................................F-3  
Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................................................................F-4  
Test Procedures  
Input Filter Capacitor Discharge Procedure .................................................................F-15  
Main Switch Board Test ................................................................................................F-17  
Input Rectifier Test ........................................................................................................F-21  
Power Board Test..........................................................................................................F-25  
Output Diode Modules Test ..........................................................................................F-29  
Auxiliary Transformer Test .............................................................................................F-33  
Current Transducer Test................................................................................................F-37  
Fan Control and Motor Test ..........................................................................................F-41  
SPI Cable Resistance and Voltage Test........................................................................F-45  
Voltage and Current Calibration Procedure ..................................................................F-47  
Replacement Procedures  
Control Board Removal and Replacement ...................................................................F-51  
Display Board Removal and Replacement ...................................................................F-55  
Main Switch Board Removal and Replacement ...........................................................F-59  
Advanced Process Panel Removal and Replacement .................................................F-63  
Remote Board Removal and Replacement ..................................................................F-69  
Snubber Board Removal and Replacement .................................................................F-73  
Power Board Removal and Replacement.....................................................................F-75  
Input Rectifier Removal and Replacement ...................................................................F-79  
Output Rectifier Modules Removal and Replacement .................................................F-83  
Current Transducer Removal and Replacement...........................................................F-87  
Retest after Repair ........................................................................................................F-92  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-2  
F-2  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
HOW TO USE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
CAUTION  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric Factory Trained Personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician and machine  
operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid Electrical Shock, please  
observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.  
This Troubleshooting Guide is provided to help  
you locate and repair possible machine  
malfunctions. Simply follow the three-step  
procedure listed below.  
Step 3. PERFORM COMPONENT TESTS. The  
last column, labeled “Recommended Course of  
Action” lists the most likely components that may  
have failed in your machine. It also specifies the  
appropriate test procedure to verify that the  
subject component is either good or bad. If there  
are a number of possible components, check the  
components in the order listed to eliminate one  
possibility at a time until you locate the cause of  
your problem.  
Step 1. LOCATE PROBLEM (SYMPTOM). Look  
under the column labeled “PROBLEM  
(SYMPTOMS)”. This column describes possible  
symptoms that the machine may exhibit. Find  
the listing that best describes the symptom that  
the machine is exhibiting. Symptoms are  
grouped into three main categories: Output  
Problems, Function Problems, and LED Function  
Problems.  
All of the referenced test procedures referred to in  
the Troubleshooting Guide are described in detail  
at the end of this chapter. Refer to the  
Troubleshooting and Repair Table of Contents to  
locate each specific Test Procedure. All of the  
referred to test points, components, terminal  
strips, etc., can be found on the referenced  
electrical wiring diagrams and schematics. Refer  
to the Electrical Diagrams Section Table of  
Contents to locate the appropriate diagram.  
Step 2. PERFORM EXTERNAL TESTS. The  
second column, labeled “POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENT(S)”, lists the obvious external  
possibilities that may contribute to the machine  
symptom. Perform these tests/checks in the  
order listed. In general, these tests can be  
conducted without removing the case  
wrap-around cover.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs  
safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before  
you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353.(WELD)  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-3  
F-3  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
PC BOARD TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES  
- Remove the PC board from the static-shielding bag  
and place it directly into the equipment. Don’t set the  
PC board on or near paper, plastic or cloth which  
could have a static charge. If the PC board can’t be  
installed immediately, put it back in the static-shield-  
ing bag.  
WARNING  
ELECTRIC SHOCK  
can kill.  
Have an electrician install and  
service this equipment. Turn the  
input power OFF at the fuse box  
before working on equipment. Do  
not touch electrically hot parts.  
- If the PC board uses protective shorting jumpers,  
don’t remove them until installation is complete.  
- If you return a PC board to The Lincoln Electric  
Company for credit, it must be in the static-shielding  
bag. This will prevent further damage and allow prop-  
er failure analysis.  
CAUTION  
Sometimes machine failures appear to be due to PC  
board failures. These problems can sometimes be  
traced to poor electrical connections. To avoid prob-  
lems when troubleshooting and replacing PC boards,  
please use the following procedure:  
4. Test the machine to determine if the failure  
symptom has been corrected by the  
replacement PC board.  
NOTE: It is desirable to have a spare (known good)  
PC board available for PC board troubleshooting.  
1. Determine to the best of your technical ability  
that the PC board is the most likely component  
causing the failure symptom.  
NOTE: Allow the machine to heat up so that all  
electrical components can reach their operating  
temperature.  
2. Check for loose connections at the PC board to  
assure that the PC board is properly connected.  
5. Remove the replacement PC board and  
substitute it with the original PC board to  
recreate the original problem.  
3. If the problem persists, replace the suspect PC  
board using standard practices to avoid static  
electrical damage and electrical shock. Read  
the warning inside the static resistant bag and  
perform the following procedures:  
a. If the original problem does not reappear by  
substituting the original board, then the PC  
board was not the problem. Continue to look  
for bad connections in the control wiring  
harness, junction blocks, and terminal strips.  
PC board can be damaged by static electricity.  
b. If the original problem is recreated by the  
substitution of the original board, then the PC  
board was the problem. Reinstall the  
replacement PC board and test the machine.  
- Remove your body’s static  
charge before opening the static-  
shielding bag. Wear an anti-static  
wrist strap. For safety, use a 1  
Meg ohm resistive cord connected  
6. Always indicate that this procedure was  
followed when warranty reports are to be  
submitted.  
to  
a
grounded part of the  
equipment frame.  
ATTENTION  
Static-Sensitive  
Devices  
Handle only at  
Static-Safe  
- If you don’t have a wrist strap,  
touch an un-painted, grounded,  
part of the equipment frame. Keep  
touching the frame to prevent  
static build-up. Be sure not to  
touch any electrically live parts at  
the same time.  
NOTE: Following this procedure and writing on the  
warranty report, “INSTALLED AND SWITCHED PC  
BOARDS TO VERIFY PROBLEM,” will help avoid  
denial of legitimate PC board warranty claims.  
Workstations  
- Tools which come in contact with the PC board must  
be either conductive, anti-static or static-dissipative.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-4  
F-4  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe Safety Guidelines  
detailed in the beginning of this manual.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
PROBLEMS  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
RECOMMENDED  
(SYMPTOMS)  
MISADJUSTMENT(S)  
COURSE OF ACTION  
OUTPUT PROBLEMS  
Major physical or electrical damage 1. Contact your local authorized 1. Contact the Lincoln Electric  
is evident when the sheet metal  
cover is removed.  
Lincoln Electric Field Service  
Facility for technical assistance.  
Service Department,  
1-800-833-9353(WELD).  
The machine is dead—no output— 1. Make sure the input line/breaker 1. Perform  
the  
Auxiliary  
no displays.  
switch is in the ON position.  
Transformer Test.  
2. Check the 3.5 amp circuit break-  
er (CB3). Reset if tripped.  
2. Perform the Power Board Test.  
3. The control rectifier and or asso-  
ciated filter capacitor (C5) may  
be faulty. Check and replace as  
necessary.  
3. Check the main input line fuses.  
If open , replace.  
4. Check the 3.5 amp circuit break-  
er (CB2). Reset if tripped.  
4. Perform  
The  
SPI  
Cable  
5. Check the 6 amp circuit breaker  
(CB1). Reset if tripped.  
Resistance and Voltage Test.  
5. The Control Board may be faulty.  
6. Make sure the reconnect switch  
and jumper lead is configured  
correctly for the applied input  
voltage.  
7. If the machine is being operated  
with single phase input voltage  
make sure the red lead is not  
connected. See the Installation  
Section.  
The main input fuses (or breaker) 1. Make certain the fuses or break- 1. Check the reconnect switches  
repeatedly fail.  
ers are sized properly.  
and associated wiring. See the  
Wiring Diagram.  
2. Make sure the reconnect switch  
and jumper lead is configured  
correctly for the applied input  
voltage.  
2. Perform the Input Rectifier  
Test.  
3. Perform the Main Switch Board  
Test.  
3. The welding procedure may be  
drawing too much input current  
or the duty cycle may be too  
high. Reduce the welding cur-  
rent and /or reduce the duty  
cycle.  
4. Perform the Output Diode  
Module Test.  
5. The Input Filter Capacitors may  
be faulty. Check, and if any are  
faulty replace all four.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, con-  
tact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call  
1-800-833-9353(WELD).  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-5  
F-5  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
Observe Safety Guidelines  
detailed in the beginning of this manual.  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENT(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
OUTPUT PROBLEMS  
The V350-Pro does not have weld- 1. Make sure the reconnect switch 1. Check the reconnect switch and  
ing output. The displays are lit.  
is configured correctly for the  
input voltage applied.  
associated leads for loose or  
faulty connections. See the  
wiring diagram.  
2. Make sure the Weld Terminals  
Select is ON. If the problem is  
solved the remote control  
device or associated circuitry  
may be faulty. See the wiring  
diagram.  
2. Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
3. Perform the Power Board  
Test.  
4. Perform the Output Diode  
3. Put the Control Select in the  
Local position. If the problem is  
solved the remote control  
device or associated circuitry  
may be faulty.  
Module Test.  
5. The control board may be faulty.  
6. The input filter capacitors may  
be faulty. Check and replace if  
necessary.  
4. If an error code is displayed see  
Fault Code Explanations.  
7. The remote board may be  
faulty.  
The V350-Pro will not produce full  
output.  
1. The input voltage may be too  
low, limiting the output capabili-  
ty of the machine. Make cer-  
tain the input voltage is correct  
for the machine and the recon-  
nect switch and jumper lead  
configuration.  
1. Perform the Output Rectifier  
Test.  
2. Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
3. Perform the Power Board  
Test.  
2. The welding current may be too  
high . The machine will fold  
4. Perform the Current  
back to 100 amps if the weld-  
ing current exceeds 450 amps.  
Transducer Test.  
5. If the preset function is not  
performing properly the status  
panel board or the output  
control may be faulty.  
3. Make sure the machine is in  
"Local" output control.. If the  
problem is resolved the Remote  
control board or the external  
remote control unit may be  
faulty.  
6. The control board may be  
faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, con-  
tact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call 1-800-833-9353(WELD).  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-6  
F-6  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe Safety Guidelines  
detailed in the beginning of this manual.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENT(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The machine regularly overheats 1. Check the 3.5 amp circuit 1. The 115VAC fan motor is con-  
and the yellow thermal light is ON  
indicating a thermal overload.  
breaker (CB2). Reset if tripped.  
trolled by the control board via  
the main switch board. Perform  
the Fan Motor And Control  
Test.  
2. The welding application may  
be exceeding the  
recommended duty cycle of the  
V350-Pro.  
1. A thermostat or associated cir-  
cuitry may be faulty. See the  
wiring diagram. One normally  
closed thermostat is located on  
the output choke and the other  
is located on the main switch  
board heat sink. See the wiring  
diagram.  
3. Dirt and dust may have clogged  
the cooling channels inside the  
machine.  
4. Air intake and exhaust louvers  
may be blocked due to inade-  
quate clearance around the  
machine.  
Note: The Main Switch Board  
Removal Procedure will be  
required to gain access to  
the heat sink thermostat.  
5. Make certain the fan as needed  
(F.A.N.) is operating properly.  
The fan should operate when  
welding voltage is present  
and/or when there is an over  
temperature condition.  
An attached wire feeder will not 1. Make certain the wire feeder 1. Perform  
the  
Auxiliary  
function correctly.  
control cable is connected to  
the correct 14-pin amphenol  
Transformer Test.  
type  
plug  
(115VAC  
or 2. Check the leads between the  
24/42VAC) for the wire feeder  
being used. See the connection  
diagram. If wirefeeder has DIP  
switch, be sure it is set correct-  
ly.  
14-pin amphenol type plugs and  
the auxiliary transformer for  
loose or faulty connections.  
2. Check the two circuit breakers  
located at the rear of the  
machine. Reset if tripped.  
3. The wire feeder or control cable  
may be faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, con-  
tact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call  
1-800-833-9353(WELD).  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-7  
F-7  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe Safety Guidelines  
detailed in the beginning of this manual.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
PROBLEMS  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
RECOMMENDED  
(SYMPTOMS)  
MISADJUSTMENT(S)  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The machine’s welding output is 1. Put the Control Select in the 1. Perform  
the  
Current  
very high and uncontrollable.  
Local position. If the problem is  
solved the remote control  
Transducer Test.  
device or associated circuitry 2. If the output is normal when  
may be faulty.  
the Control Select is in the Local  
position but the output is very  
high in the Remote position the  
remote board may be faulty.  
Perform The SPI Cable  
Resistance and Voltage Test.  
2. Check for proper current and  
voltage calibration.  
3. The control board may be faulty.  
The Weld Mode Select does not 1. Refer to Operation Section of 1. Check for loose or faulty plug  
function properly.  
this manual for normal operation  
characteristics.  
connections between the con-  
trol board and the mode select  
panel. See the wiring diagram.  
NOTE: The mode panel is not pre-  
sent if the advanced 2. Perform  
the  
SPI  
Cable  
process panel is installed.  
Resistance and Voltage Test.  
3. The Mode Select Panel board  
may be faulty.  
4. The control board may be faulty.  
The output control and/or Weld 1. Refer to Operation Section of 1. Check for loose or faulty plug  
Terminals Select functions do not  
this manual for normal operation  
connections  
between  
the  
operate properly.  
characteristics.  
remote board and the weld/out-  
put controls. See the wiring dia-  
gram.  
2. Check for proper current and  
voltage calibration.  
2. The Remote Board may be  
faulty.  
3. The control board may be faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, con-  
tact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call 1-800-833-9353(WELD).  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-8  
F-8  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe Safety Guidelines  
detailed in the beginning of this manual.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
PROBLEMS  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
RECOMMENDED  
(SYMPTOMS)  
MISADJUSTMENT(S)  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The display is not functioning prop- 1. Refer to the Operation Section 1. Check for loose or faulty plug  
erly.  
of this manual for normal opera-  
connections  
between  
the  
tion characteristics.  
Display board and the control  
board. See the wiring diagram.  
2. Check for proper current and  
voltage calibration.  
2. The display board may be faulty.  
3. The control board may be faulty.  
A fault or error code is displayed.  
1. See  
the  
Fault  
Code 1. See Fault Code Explanations.  
Explanations.  
For no apparent reason the welding 1. Check the welding cables for 1. Perform the Voltage and  
characteristics have change.  
loose or faulty connection.  
Current  
Calibration  
Procedure.  
2. Make sure the machine’s mode  
and output are set correctly for 2. Perform  
the  
Current  
the process being used. (CV,  
CC,TIG etc.)  
Transducer Test.  
3. Perform the Output Diode  
3. If Mig welding make sure the  
shielding gas and wire speed are  
Module Test  
correct for the process being 4. The control board may be faulty.  
used.  
4. Check for proper current and 5. The advanced process panel (If  
voltage calibration.  
used) may be faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the test/repairs safely, con-  
tact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call 1-800-833-9353(WELD).  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-9  
F-9  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DESCRIPTION/  
DEFINITION  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
SERVICE FACILITY  
FAULT CODES  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
Main transformer  
primary over current  
Turn the machine off and  
back on to reset the  
machine. If condition  
persists, contact an  
authorized Lincoln Field  
Service Facility.  
31  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
There may be a problem  
with the primary current  
sensors (CT) located on  
the main switch board.  
See the Wiring diagram  
The control board may  
be faulty.  
There may be a problem  
with the V/F signals from  
the main switch board to  
the control board.  
Capacitor bank “A”  
(lower) is under  
voltage  
Make sure the reconnect  
switches are configured  
for the input voltage  
being applied to the  
machine. The machine  
is self clearing when  
condition ceases.  
32  
Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
The control board may  
be faulty.  
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults  
before replacing the printed circuit board  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-10  
F-10  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DESCRIPTION/  
DEFINITION  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
SERVICE FACILITY  
FAULT CODES  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
There may be a problem  
with the V/F signals from  
the main switch board to  
the control board.  
Capacitor bank  
"B"(upper) is under  
voltage.  
Make sure the reconnect  
switches are configured  
for the input voltage  
being applied to the  
machine. The machine  
is self-clearing when  
condition ceases.  
33  
Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
The control board may  
be faulty.  
There may be a problem  
with the V/F signals from  
the main switch board to  
the control board.  
Capacitor bank  
"A"(lower) is over  
voltage.  
Make sure the reconnect  
switches are configured  
for the input voltage  
being applied to the  
machine. The machine  
is self-clearing when  
condition ceases.  
34  
Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
The control board may  
be faulty.  
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults  
before replacing the printed circuit board  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-11  
F-11  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DESCRIPTION/  
DEFINITION  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
SERVICE FACILITY  
FAULT CODES  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
There may be a problem  
with the V/F signals from  
the main switch board to  
the control board.  
Capacitor bank  
"B"(lower) is over  
voltage.  
Make sure the reconnect  
switches are configured  
for the input voltage  
being applied to the  
machine. The machine  
is self-clearing when  
condition ceases.  
35  
Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
The control board may  
be faulty.  
There may be a problem  
with the V/F signals from  
the main switch board to  
the control board.  
The soft start  
function failed.  
Turn the machine off and  
back on to reset the  
machine.  
37  
Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
The control board may  
be faulty.  
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults  
before replacing the printed circuit board  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-12  
F-12  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DESCRIPTION/  
DEFINITION  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
SERVICE FACILITY  
FAULT CODES  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
Electrical "glitch" on the  
primary over current fault  
detector circuit.  
Possibly caused by an  
external electrical  
39  
"noise" or signal level.  
Make sure the V350-Pro  
is grounded correctly.  
The machine is self  
clearing when  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
There may be a problem  
with the primary current  
sensors (CT) located on  
the main switch board.  
See the wiring diagram.  
condition ceases.  
The control board may  
be faulty.  
There may be a problem  
with the V/F signals from  
the main switch board to  
the control board.  
Capacitor banks "A"  
(lower) and "B"(upper)  
are not balanced.  
Make sure the recon-  
nect switches are con-  
figured for the input  
voltage being applied to  
the machine. The  
machine is self-clearing  
when  
43  
Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
condition ceases.  
The capacitor(s) may be  
faulty. Check and  
replace if necessary.  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
Make sure the V350-Pro  
is grounded correctly.  
The machine is self  
clearing when  
44  
The machine has  
detected a fault in the  
central processing unit  
The control board or  
associated wiring may be  
faulty. See the wiring  
diagram.  
(CPU).  
condition ceases.  
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults  
before replacing the printed circuit board  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-13  
F-13  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DESCRIPTION/  
DEFINITION  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
SERVICE FACILITY  
FAULT CODES  
CORRECTIVE  
ACTION  
There may be a problem  
with the V/F signals from  
the main switch board to  
the control board.  
Electrical "glitch" on the  
V/F signals from the main  
switch board to the  
control board.  
Possibly caused by an  
external electrical  
47  
"noise" or signal level.  
Make sure the V350-Pro  
is grounded correctly.  
The machine is self  
clearing when condition  
ceases.  
Perform the Main Switch  
Board Test.  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
The control board may  
be faulty.  
If new software was just  
installed, try reinstalling  
the software or put the  
original software back.  
The selected weld mode  
does not exist in the weld  
table that is presently  
Press the Mode Select  
button to select a  
different welding mode.  
“bad node” “####”  
loaded in the machine.  
Perform the Power  
Board Test.  
Perform the SPI Cable  
Resistance and Voltage  
Test.  
The control board may  
be faulty.  
NOTE: If more than one fault message is being displayed, perform all the checks for the faults  
before replacing the printed circuit board  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-14  
F-14  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-15  
F-15  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
INPUT FILTER CAPACITOR DISCHARGE PROCEDURE  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained  
personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to  
the technician or machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your  
safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions  
detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This procedure will drain off any charge stored in the four large capacitors that are part  
of the switch board assembly. This procedure MUST be performed, as a safety pre-  
caution, before conducting any test or repair procedure that requires you to touch inter-  
nal components of the machine.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Insulated Pliers  
Insulated Gloves  
High Wattage Resistor (25-1000 ohms and 25 watts minimum)  
DC Volt Meter  
This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-16  
F-16  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
INPUT FILTER CAPACITOR DISCHARGE PROCEDURE (continued)  
4. Obtain a high resistance and high wattage resistor  
(25-1000 ohms and 25 watts minimum). This  
resistor is not with the machine. NEVER USE A  
SHORTING STRAP FOR THIS PROCEDURE.  
WARNING  
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.  
• Have an electrician install and service  
this equipment.  
5. Locate the eight capacitor terminals shown in fig-  
ure F.1.  
Turn the input power off at the fuse box  
before working on equipment.  
6. Using electrically insulated gloves and pliers, hold  
the body of the resistor with the pliers and con-  
nect the resistor leads across the two capacitor  
terminals. Hold the resistor in place for 10 sec-  
onds. DO NOT TOUCH CAPACITOR TERMINALS  
WITH YOUR BARE HANDS.  
• Do not touch electrically hot parts.  
• Prior to performing preventative maintenance,  
perform the following capacitor discharge procedure  
to avoid electric shock.  
7. Repeat the discharge procedure for the other  
three capacitors.  
DISCHARGE PROCEDURE  
8. Check the voltage across the terminals of all  
capacitors with a DC voltmeter. Polarity of the  
capacitor terminals is marked on the PC board  
above the terminals. Voltage should be zero. If  
any voltage remains, repeat this capacitor dis-  
1. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using the 5/16” wrench remove the screws from  
the case wraparound cover.  
3. Be careful not to make contact with the capacitor  
terminals located at the top and bottom of the  
switch board.  
charge procedure.  
FIGURE F.1 – LOCATION OF INPUT FILTER CAPACITOR TERMINALS  
EIGHT  
CAPACITOR  
TERMINALS  
- +  
- +  
INSULATED  
PLIERS  
- +  
- +  
INSULATED  
GLOVES  
POWER  
RESISTOR  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-17  
F-17  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
MAIN SWITCH BOARD TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the “power section” of the switch boards are functioning cor-  
rectly. This test will NOT indicate if the entire PC board is functional. This resistance test is  
preferable to a voltage test with the machine energized because this board can be damaged  
easily. In addition, it is dangerous to work on this board with the machine energized.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Analog Volt/Ohmmeter  
5/16 in. Wrench  
7/16 in. Wrench  
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-18  
F-18  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
MAIN SWITCH BOARD TEST (continued)  
FIGURE F.2 MAIN SWITCH BOARD LEAD LOCATIONS  
207  
202  
J22  
- +  
- +  
209  
201  
204  
208  
205  
J21  
J20  
- +  
- +  
206  
203  
TEST PROCEDURE  
4. Using a 7/16” wrench locate, label and remove  
leads 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 207 and  
208 from the switch board. Note lead and  
washer placement for reassembly. Clear  
leads.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the case  
wraparound.  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
5. Using the Analog ohmmeter, perform the resis-  
tance tests detailed in Table F.1. Refer to fig-  
ure F.2 for test point locations. Note: Test  
using an Analog ohmmeter on the Rx1 range.  
Make sure the test probes are making electri-  
cal contact with the conductor surfaces on the  
PC board.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-19  
F-19  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
MAIN SWITCH BOARD TEST (continued)  
6. If any test fails replace the switch board. See  
8. Reconnect leads 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206,  
207, and 208 to the switch board. Ensure that the  
leads are installed in their proper locations. Pre-  
Torque all leads nuts to 25 inch lbs. before tight-  
ening them to 44 inch lbs.  
Main Switch Board Removal and Replacement.  
7. If the switch board resistance tests are OK, check  
connections on plugs J20, J21, J22 and all asso-  
ciated wiring. See wiring diagram.  
9. Replace the case wraparound cover using a 5/16”  
nut driver.  
TABLE F.1. SWITCH BOARD RESISTANCE TEST  
APPLY NEGATIVE TEST  
PROBE TO TERMINAL  
NORMAL  
RESISTANCE READING  
APPLY POSITIVE TEST  
PROBE TO TERMINAL  
+206  
+208  
+202  
+201  
+205  
+203  
+204  
+207  
-205  
-203  
-204  
-207  
-206  
-208  
-202  
-201  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-20  
F-20  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-21  
F-21  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
INPUT RECTIFIER TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the input rectifier has “shorted” or “open” diodes.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Analog Voltmeter/Ohmmeter (Multimeter)  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Phillips Head Screwdriver  
Wiring Diagram  
This procedure takes approximately 25 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-22  
F-22  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
INPUT RECTIFIER TEST (CONTINUED)  
TEST PROCEDURE  
6. Using  
a
phillips head screwdriver,  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO  
machine.  
remove leads 207, 207A, and 209 from  
the input rectifier.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the case  
wraparound cover.  
7. Use the analog ohmmeter to perform the  
tests detailed in Table F.2. See the  
Wiring Diagram.  
3. Perform the Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
8. Visually inspect the three MOV’S for  
damage (TP1,TP2,TP3). Replace if nec-  
essary.  
4. Locate the input rectifier and associated  
leads. See Figure F.3.  
5. Carefully remove the silicone sealant  
from leads 207, 207A, and 209.  
Figure F.3 Input Rectifier  
Small Lead "H1"  
To Auxiliary Transformer  
3/16" ALLEN  
BOLTS  
C
B
#207  
#207A  
A
#209  
Small Lead "A"  
To Circuit Breaker  
FRONT  
REAR  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-23  
F-23  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
INPUT RECTIFIER TEST (CONTINUED)  
Table F.2 Input Rectifier Test Points  
ANALOG METER  
X10 RANGE  
TEST POINT TERMINALS  
Acceptable Meter Readings  
+ PROBE  
- PROBE  
207  
207  
207  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
A
B
C
207A  
207A  
207A  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
A
B
C
209  
209  
209  
Less than 100 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
A
B
C
A
B
C
Less than 100 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
207  
207  
207  
A
B
C
Less than 100 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
Less than 100 ohms  
207A  
207A  
207A  
A
B
C
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
Greater than 1000 ohms  
209  
209  
209  
9. If the input rectifier does not meet the  
acceptable readings outlined in Table F.2  
the component may be faulty. Replace  
11. If the input rectifier is faulty, see the  
Input Rectifier Bridge Removal &  
Replacement procedure.  
Note: Before replacing the input rectifier,  
check the input power switch and per-  
form the Main Switch Board Test. Also  
check for leaky or faulty filter capacitors.  
12. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
10. If the input rectifier is good, be sure to  
reconnect leads 207, 207A, and 209 to  
the correct terminals and torque to 31  
inch lbs. Apply silicone sealant.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-24  
F-24  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-25  
F-25  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
POWER BOARD TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the power board is receiving the correct voltages and also if  
the power board is regulating and producing the correct DC voltages.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Volt-Ohmmeter  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Wiring Diagram  
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-26  
F-26  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
POWER BOARD TEST (CONTINUED)  
TEST PROCEDURE  
7. If the 40VDC is low, or not present at plug  
J41, check the rectifier bridge and C5 filter  
capacitor. See Wiring Diagram. Also per-  
form the Auxiliary Transformer Test.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO  
machine.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the case  
wraparound cover.  
8. If any of the DC voltages are low, or not  
present at plugs J42 or J43, the power  
board may be faulty.  
3. Perform the Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
4. Locate the power board and plugs J41, J42  
and J43. Do not remove plugs from the  
power board. See Figure F.4.  
9. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.  
10. Replace the case wraparound cover using  
a 5/16” nut driver.  
5. Carefully apply the correct input voltage to  
the V350-PRO.  
6. Carefully test for the correct voltages at the  
power board. See Table F.3.  
Figure F.4 Power Board Plug Location  
J43  
J42  
J41  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-27  
F-27  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
POWER BOARD TEST (CONTINUED)  
Table F.3 Power Board Voltage Checks  
NORMAL  
ACCEPTABLE  
VOLTAGE  
CHECK POINT  
TEST  
DESCRIPTION  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG PIN NO.  
LEAD NO.  
OR IDENTITY  
LOCATION  
READING  
2(+)  
1(-)  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG J41  
CHECK 40VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
RECT. BRIDGE  
TO POWER BD.  
65 (+)  
66 (-)  
38-42 VDC  
65  
66  
1(+)  
5(-)  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG J42  
CHECK +15VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
410  
412 (+)  
410 (-)  
15 VDC  
5 VDC  
412  
3(+)  
5(-)  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG J42  
CHECK +5VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
410  
408 (+)  
410 (-)  
408  
2(+)  
5(-)  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG J42  
CHECK -15VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
410  
411  
-15 VDC  
5 VDC  
411 (+)  
410 (-)  
3(+)  
12(-)  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG J43  
CHECK +5VDC  
“SPI” SUPPLY  
FROM POWER  
PC BOARD  
401  
403 (+)  
401 (-)  
403  
4(+)  
9(-)  
CHECK +5VDC  
“RS232”  
SUPPLY FROM  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG J43  
405  
5 VDC  
406 (+)  
405 (-)  
406  
6(+)  
12(-)  
POWER PC  
BOARD  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG J43  
CHECK +15VDC  
“SPI” SUPPLY  
FROM POWER  
PC BOARD  
401  
402  
15 VDC  
402 (+)  
401 (-)  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-28  
F-28  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-29  
F-29  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUTPUT DIODE MODULES TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if any of the output diodes are “shorted”.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Analog Voltmeter/Ohmmeter  
Wiring Diagram  
This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-30  
F-30  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUTPUT DIODE MODULES TEST (continued)  
FIGURE F.5 Machine Output Terminals  
AMPS  
OLTS  
V
CONTROL  
SELECT  
WELD TERMINALS  
REMOTE  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
SELECT ATTRIBUTE  
MEMORY BUTTON  
SELECT KNOB  
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE  
_
+
NEGATIVE  
OUTPUT  
POSITIVE  
OUTPUT  
TERMINAL  
TERMINAL  
TEST PROCEDURE  
4. Using the analog ohmmeter test for more  
than 200 ohms resistance between positive  
and negative output terminals. Positive test  
lead to the positive terminal; Negative test  
lead to the negative terminal. See Figure  
F.6.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Locate the output terminals on the front  
panel of the machine. See Figure F.5.  
3. Remove any output cables and load from the  
output terminals.  
NOTE: The polarity of the test leads is most  
important. If the test leads polarity is not cor-  
rect, the test will have erroneous results.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-31  
F-31  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUTPUT DIODE MODULES TEST (continued)  
Figure F.6 Terminal Probes  
_
+
5. If 200 ohms is measured then the output  
diodes are not “shorted”.  
NOTE: This may require the disassembly of  
the leads and the snubber board from the  
diode modules. Refer to the Output Diode  
Modules Removal and Replacement  
Procedure for detailed instructions.  
NOTE: There is a 250 ohm resistor across the  
welding output terminals.  
6. If less than 200 ohms is measured, one or  
more diodes or the snubber board may be  
faulty.  
7. Perform the Filter Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
8. Locate the output diode modules and snub-  
ber board. See Figure F.7.  
9. Test all output diode modules individually.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-32  
F-32  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUTPUT DIODE MODULES TEST (continued)  
Figure F.7 Snubber and Output Diode Locations  
Output Diode  
Modules  
Snubber  
Board  
LEFT SIDE  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-33  
F-33  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This procedure will determine if the correct voltage is being applied to the primary of auxil-  
iary transformer and also if the correct voltage is being induced on the secondary windings  
of the transformer.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Volt-ohmmeter (Multimeter)  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Wiring Diagram  
This procedure takes approximately 25 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-34  
F-34  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER TEST (continued)  
FIGURE F.8 Auxiliary Transformer  
Auxiliary  
Transformer  
Secondary Lead  
Plugs P52  
A A  
M
PS  
V V  
OL  
TS  
A
C
C-STIC  
OUTPU  
T
K
70  
60  
W
E
CC-STICK  
18  
10  
LD  
T
E
TIG  
R
M
G
T
IN  
A
A
W
CV  
CV  
LS  
-W  
IRE  
-FLU  
X
HO  
T
S
E
C
ST  
AR  
LE  
C
O
RE  
T
D
4
T
5
3
S
EL  
6
E
CT  
ARC  
CO  
2
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
7
NTROL  
1
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
R
E
M
O
T
E
-6  
+2  
9
10  
+4  
-8  
+6  
+8  
-10  
SOFT  
+10  
CRISP  
P
O
W
E
R
O
N
TEST PROCEDURE  
4. Locate the auxiliary transformer. See Figure  
F.8.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the case  
wraparound cover.  
5. Locate the secondary leads and plug P52.  
See Figure F.8 and F.9.  
3. Perform the Input Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
FIGURE F.9 Plug Lead Connections Viewed From Transformer Lead Side of Plug  
532  
42  
24  
2
5
1
6
7
8
3
4
10  
12  
14  
15  
16  
9
11  
13  
Plug P52  
54  
31  
541  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-35  
F-35  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER NO.1 TEST (continued)  
TABLE F.4  
NORMAL EXPECTED VOLTAGE  
LEAD IDENTIFICATION  
31 TO 532  
42 TO 541  
24 TO 541  
54 TO 541  
115 VAC  
42 VAC  
24 VAC  
28 VAC  
7. Carefully apply the correct input voltage to the  
V350-PRO and check for the correct sec-  
ondary voltages per table F.4. Make sure the  
reconnect jumper lead and switch are config-  
ured correctly for the input voltage being  
applied. Make sure circuit breaker (CB3) is  
functioning properly.  
WARNING  
High voltage is present at primary of  
Auxiliary Transformer.  
9. If the correct input voltage is applied to the  
primary, and the secondary voltage(s) are not  
correct, the auxiliary transformer may be  
faulty.  
NOTE: The secondary voltages will vary if the  
input line voltage varies.  
8. If the correct secondary voltages are present,  
the auxiliary transformer is functioning proper-  
ly. If any of the secondary voltages are miss-  
ing or low, check to make certain the primary  
is configured correctly for the input voltage  
applied. See Wiring Diagram.  
10. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.  
11. Install the case wraparound cover using a  
5/16” nut driver.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-36  
F-36  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-37  
F-37  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
CURRENT TRANSDUCER TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the current transducer and associated wiring are functioning  
correctly.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Volt-ohmmeter  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Resistive Load Bank  
External DC Ammeter  
This procedure takes approximately 45 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-38  
F-38  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
CURRENT TRANSDUCER TEST (continued)  
FIGURE F.10 Metal Plate Removal & Plug J8 Location  
A A  
M
PS  
V V  
OL  
TS  
A
CC  
C
OUTPUT  
-STICK 7018  
W
C-STICK 6010  
E
LD  
SE  
T
ER  
TIG  
M
G
IN  
ALS  
T
A
W
C
V
-W  
IR  
E
CV  
-FLU  
H
O
T
X
CO  
S
LE  
T
A
C
R
RED  
R
T
4
T
5
3
SELEC  
6
A
T
2
R
WA  
C
C
O
R
N
I
N
G
7
N
T
1
O
L
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
R
E
M
O
T
E
+2  
-6  
9
10  
+4  
-8  
+6  
+8  
-10  
SOFT  
+10  
CRISP  
P
O
W
E
R
O
N
Plug J8  
6. Check for the correct DC supply voltages to  
the current transducer at plug J8. See Figure  
F.11.  
TEST PROCEDURE  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using the 5/16” nut driver, remove the case  
wraparound cover.  
A. Pin 2 (lead 802+) to pin 6 (lead 806-)  
should read +15 VDC.  
3. Perform the Input Capacitor Discharge  
B. Pin 4 (lead 804+) to pin 6 (lead 806-)  
should read -15 VDC.  
Procedure.  
4. Locate plug J8 on the control board. Do not  
remove the plug from the P.C. Board.  
7. If either of the supply voltages are low or miss-  
ing, the control board may be faulty.  
5. Apply the correct input power to the V350-  
PRO.  
FIGURE F.11. Plug J8 Viewed From Lead Side of Plug  
802  
804  
801  
Plug J8  
806  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-39  
F-39  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
CURRENT TRANSDUCER TEST (continued)  
TABLE F.5  
EXPECTED TRANSDUCER FEEDBACK  
OUTPUT LOAD CURRENT  
VOLTAGE  
300  
250  
2.4  
2.0  
200  
150  
100  
1.6  
1.2  
0.8  
8. Check the feedback voltage from the current  
transducer using a resistive load bank and  
with the V350-PRO in mode 200. Mode 200 is  
a constant current test mode. This mode can  
be accessed from the front panel of the V350  
by pressing and holding the Mode Select but-  
ton while turning the machine on. NOTE:  
Machines with an Advanced Process Panels  
do not have a mode select button. Use the  
same procedure except hold in the Memory  
button on the advanced process panel instead  
of the mode select button. Then, rotate the  
output knob while still holding the Mode Select  
button in until the displays read “Mode 200”.  
Release the Mode Select Button and the  
machine will be in mode 200. With the V350-  
PRO in mode 200, apply the grid load across  
the output of the V350-PRO, set machine out-  
put to 300 amps and enable WELD TERMI-  
NALS. Adjust the grid load to obtain 300  
amps on the external ammeter and check  
feedback voltages per Table F.5.  
9. If for any reason the machine cannot be  
loaded to 300 amps, Table F.5. shows what  
feedback voltage is produced at various cur-  
rent loads.  
10. If the correct supply voltages are applied to  
the current transducer, and with the machine  
loaded, the feedback voltage is missing or not  
correct the current transducer may be faulty.  
Before replacing the current transducer, check  
the leads and plugs between the control board  
(J8) and the current transducer (J90). See The  
Wiring Diagram. For access to plug J90 and  
the current transducer refer to: Current  
Transducer Removal and Replacement  
Procedure.  
11. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
12. Replace the control box top and any cable ties  
previously removed.  
13. Install the case wraparound cover using the  
5/16” nut driver.  
A. Pin 1 (lead 801) to Pin 6 (lead 806) should  
read 2.4 VDC (machine loaded to 300  
amps).  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-40  
F-40  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-41  
F-41  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
FAN CONTROL AND MOTOR TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the fan motor, control board, switch board, or associated leads  
and connectors are functioning correctly.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Voltmeter  
5/16” Nut Driver  
This procedure takes approximately 40 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-42  
F-42  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
FAN CONTROL AND MOTOR TEST (continued)  
TEST PROCEDURE  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
1. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO  
machine.  
Procedure.  
4. Locate plug J22 on the main switch board. Do  
not remove the plug from the board. See  
Figure F.12.  
2. Using the 5/16” nut driver, remove the case  
wraparound cover.  
FIGURE F.12 PLUG J22 LOCATION  
J22  
J21  
J20  
5. Carefully apply the correct input power to the  
machine.  
6. Carefully check for 115VAC at plug J22 pin-2  
to J22 pin-3. (leads 32A to 31B(C) See Figure  
F.13. WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRE-  
SENT AT THE MAIN SWITCH BOARD.  
FIGURE F.13 PLUG J22  
Fan Lead  
2
1
3
Lead 32A  
4
Fan Lead  
Lead 31B(C)  
Plug J22  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-43  
F-43  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
FAN CONTROL AND MOTOR TEST (continued)  
7. If the 115VAC is low or not present check cir-  
FAN CONTROL TEST PROCEDURE  
cuit breaker CB2 located on the front panel. If  
the circuit breaker is OK, perform The  
Auxiliary Transformer Test. Check plug J22,  
circuit breaker CB2 and associated leads for  
loose or faulty connections. See the Wiring  
Diagram.  
1. Locate plug J20 on the switch board. Do not  
remove the plug from the switch board. See  
Figure F.12 and F.14.  
2. Energize the weld output terminals (Select  
Weld Terminals ON) and carefully check for  
+15VDC at plug J20 pin-6+ to J20 pin-2-  
(leads 715 to 716). See Figure F.14. If the  
15VDC is present and the fan is not running  
then the switch board may be faulty. If the  
15VDC is not present when the weld terminals  
are energized then the control board may be  
faulty. Also check plugs J20, J7, and all asso-  
ciated leads for loose or faulty connections.  
See the Wiring Diagram.  
8. Energize the weld output terminals (Select  
Weld Terminals ON) and carefully check for  
115VAC at plug J22 pin-1 to J22 pin-4 (fan  
leads). See Figure F.13. If the 115VAC is pre-  
sent and the fan is not running then the fan  
motor may be faulty. Also check the associat-  
ed leads between plug J22 and the fan motor  
for loose or faulty connections. See the Wiring  
Diagram. WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE IS  
PRESENT AT THE SWITCH BOARD.  
WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT  
THE SWITCH BOARD.  
9. If the 115VAC is NOT present in the previous  
step then proceed to the fan control test.  
3. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.  
Note: The fan motor may be accessed by the  
removal of the rear panel detailed in The  
Current  
Transducer  
Removal  
and  
Replacement Procedure.  
4. Replace the case wrap-around cover.  
FIGURE F.14 PLUG J20  
Lead 716-  
1
3
2
4
8
5 6 7  
Plug J20  
Lead 715+  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-44  
F-44  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-45  
F-45  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
SPI CABLE RESISTANCE AND VOLTAGE TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if there is a possible “open” in the SPI cable and also determine  
if the correct supply voltages are being applied to the boards in the SPI network.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Volt/Ohmmeter  
5/16” Nut Driver  
This procedure takes approximately 35 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-46  
F-46  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
SPI CABLE RESISTANCE AND VOLTAGE TEST (continued)  
8. Reconnect the plug into the control board and  
perform the Display Board Replacement  
Procedure.  
TEST PROCEDURE  
1. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using the 5/16” nut driver, remove the case  
wraparound cover.  
9. With plug J3 still removed from the control  
board, carefully apply the correct input power  
to V350-PRO.  
3. Perform the Capacitor Discharge Procedure.  
10. Turn on the machine.  
4. Perform the Display Board Removal  
Procedure. Do not remove the SPI ribbon  
cable connecting the display board to the  
remote/status boards.  
11. Carefully check for the presence of +15VDC  
from plug J3 pin -1(+) to plug J3 pin -10(-) at  
the control board receptacle. See Figure F.15.  
5. Locate and remove plug J3 from the control  
board. See Figure F.15.  
12. Carefully check for the presence of +5VDC  
from plug J3 pin -2(+) to plug J3 pin -10(-) at  
the control board receptacle. See Figure F.15.  
6. Check the resistance and continuity of the SPI  
cable by testing with the ohmmeter from each  
pin on plug J3 to the corresponding pins on  
plug J34. See the Wiring Diagram.  
13. If either of these voltages are low or not pre-  
sent, the control board may be faulty. Replace.  
Also Perform the Power Board Test.  
7. The resistance reading pin to corresponding  
pin should be zero ohms or very low resis-  
tance. If the resistance reading is high or  
“open” check the plug connections to the SPI  
network PC boards. If the connections are OK  
and the resistance is high or “open” the SPI  
cable may be faulty.  
14. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO  
machine.  
15. Replace plug J3 into the control board.  
16. Replace any cable ties previously removed.  
17. Replace the case wrap-around cover.  
FIGURE F.15 Plug J3  
Pin 1  
Pin 2  
Plug J3  
J3  
Pin 10  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-47  
F-47  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the machine is capable of producing welding output and to  
check and adjust, if necessary, the voltage and or current calibration.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Resistive Load Bank  
Calibrated Test Voltmeter  
Calibrated Test Ammeter  
This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-48  
F-48  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE (continued)  
CALIBRATION CHECK  
VOLTAGE CALIBRATION  
The calibration of the V350-PRO can be checked  
using a resistive load bank with the V350-PRO in  
mode 200. Mode 200 is a constant current test  
mode.  
1. Connect the resistive load band (approximate-  
ly .087 ohms) and test voltmeter to the welding  
output terminals.  
2. Press and hold in the Mode Select/Memory  
button.  
1. Press and hold in the Mode Select button.  
2. Turn on the V350-PRO.  
3. Turn on the V350-PRO.  
3. Rotate the output knob, while still holding the  
mode select button in, until the displays read  
4. Rotate the Output Control knob until the dis-  
play reads “vol cAL”.  
“mode 200”.  
NOTE: Machines with an  
5. Release the Mode Select/Memory button.  
Advanced Process Panels do not have a mode  
select button. Use the same procedure except  
hold in the Memory button on the advanced  
process panel instead of the mode select but-  
ton.  
6. Adjust the output control knob until the actual  
output voltage reading on the test volt meter is  
20volts +/- .5 volts.  
7. Wait for the machine’s output to be automati-  
cally turned off and then back on.  
4. Release the Mode Select/Memory button and  
the machine will be in mode 200.  
8. Adjust the Output Control knob again if neces-  
sary to make the actual voltage output 20 volts  
+/- .5 volts.  
5. With the machine in mode 200 apply a resistive  
load to the welding output terminals (approxi-  
mately .087 ohms) set the machine output to  
300 amps and enable the Weld Terminals.  
(Weld Terminals Select ON).  
9. Wait for the machine’s output to be automati-  
cally turned off and then back on.  
10. Repeat the above two steps if necessary.  
6. Using the test meters note the output voltage  
and current.  
11. Press and release the Mode Select/Memory  
button to save the calibration.  
7. The V350-PRO voltmeter must match the test  
meter reading to within +/- 1 volt.  
NOTE: If the Mode Select/Memory button is  
not pressed within 30 seconds after adjusting  
the Output Control knob the machine will leave  
the calibration mode and use the previous cal-  
ibration settings.  
8. The V350-PRO ammeter must match the test  
meter within +/- 5 amps.  
9. If the voltmeter does not meet the specification  
then proceed to the Voltage Calibration  
Procedure.  
10. If the ammeter does not meet the specification  
then proceed to the Current Calibration  
Procedure.  
NOTE: Before attempting to calibrate the voltage  
or current setting of the V350-PRO, be sure to read  
the entire voltage or current calibration section. If  
the steps are not completed quickly, the machine  
will automatically leave the calibration mode with-  
out changing the calibration settings. The voltage  
and current calibration settings of the V350-PRO  
are completely independent of each other.  
Adjusting one will not affect the other.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-49  
F-49  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE (continued)  
CURRENT CALIBRATION  
PROCEDURE  
1. Connect the resistive load band (approxi-  
mately .087 ohms) and test ammeter to the  
welding output terminals.  
10. Adjust the Output Control knob again if  
necessary to make the actual output cur-  
rent reading on the test ammeter 300  
amps +/-2A.  
2. Press and hold in the Mode Select/Memory  
button.  
11. Wait for the machines output to be a u t o -  
matically turned off and then back on.  
3. Turn on the V350-PRO.  
12. Repeat the above two steps if necessary.  
4. Rotate the Output Control knob until the  
display reads “cur cAL”.  
13. Press  
and  
release  
the  
Mode  
Select/Memory button to save the calibra-  
tion.  
5. Release the Mode Select/Memory button.  
6. The left display will change to “IcAL” to  
indicate that current calibration is in  
progress.  
14. The left display will scroll the message IcAL  
SAVEd.  
15. The machine will reset to normal operation.  
7. The right display will scroll the following  
message: Adj oCP SorEAL cur-300A.  
NOTE: If the Mode Select/Memory button  
is not pressed within 30 seconds after  
adjusting the Output Control knob the  
machine will leave the calibration mode  
and use the previous calibration settings.  
8. Adjust the Output Control knob until the  
actual output current reading on the test  
ammeter is 300amps +/-2A.  
9. Wait for the machines output to be  
automatically turned off and then back on.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-50  
F-50  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-51  
F-51  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353) (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the control board for maintenance  
or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16” Nut Driver  
3/8” Nut Driver  
Flathead Screwdriver  
Phillips Head Screwdriver  
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-52  
F-52  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.16 - CONTROL BOARD LOCATION  
A A  
M
PS  
V V  
OL  
TS  
CC-STICK 7018  
CC-STICK 6010  
OUTPUT  
WELD  
TERMINALS  
TIG  
CV  
G
T
A
W
-WIRE  
CV  
-FLUX CORED  
HOT  
SELECT  
ST  
AR  
4
T
5
3
SELECT  
6
2
AR  
WA  
C
CO  
NT  
R
N
I
N
G
7
1
ROL  
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
R
E
M
O
T
E
-6  
+2  
9
10  
+4  
-8  
+6  
+8  
-10  
SOFT  
+10  
CRISP  
P
O
W
E
R
O
N
Control Board  
PROCEDURE  
4. Locate the control board behind the front panel of  
the machine. See Figure F.16.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wrap-  
around cover.  
5. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the two screws  
from the bottom of the front of the machine. See  
Figure F.17.  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
FIGURE F.17 CASE FRONT SCREW REMOVAL  
AMPS  
VOLTS  
CONTROL  
WELD TERMINALS  
REMOTE  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
SELECT  
SELECT ATTRIBUTE  
MEMORY BUTTON  
SELECT KNOB  
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE  
Flathead Screws  
Phillips Head  
Screws  
_
+
5/16" Screws  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-53  
F-53  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.18. - CONTROL BOARD ALL PLUG LOCATIONS  
J6  
J7  
J5  
J8  
J9  
J4  
J3  
A A  
M
PS  
V V  
OL  
TS  
A
CC  
OUTPUT  
-STIC  
K
K
WELD  
C
C
7018  
-STIC  
TERMINALS  
TIG  
G
6
010  
TA  
J10B  
W
C
V
-W  
IR  
E
C
V-  
F
HOT  
S
L
SELECT  
U
X
CO  
T
R
AR  
E
D
4
T
5
3
SE  
LE  
6
C
ARC  
2
T
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
C
ONTROL  
7
1
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
+2  
R
E
M
O
T
E
-6  
9
10  
+4  
+6  
-8  
-10  
SOFT  
+8  
+10  
CRISP  
J10A  
P
O
W
E
R
O
N
8. The front of the machine may now gently be pulled  
forward to gain access to the display Board. Note:  
The front of the machine cannot be removed com-  
pletely, only pulled forward a few inches.  
CAUTION  
Observe static precautions detailed in PC  
Board Troubleshooting Procedures at the  
beginning of this section.  
9. Beginning at the right side of the control board  
remove plugs J10A and J10B. Note: Be sure to  
label each plugs position upon removal. See  
Figure F.18.  
10. Working your way across the top of the board  
from right to left, label and remove plugs #J9, #J8,  
#J7, #J6, and #J5. See Figure F.18.  
6. Using a flat head screwdriver remove the two  
screws and their washers from above and below  
the input power switch. See Figure F.17.  
11. Working your way down the left side of the board,  
label and remove plugs #J4 and #J3. See Figure  
F.18.  
7. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the four  
screws from around the two welder output termi-  
nals on the front of the machine. See Figure F.17.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-54  
F-54  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
12. Using a 3/8” nut driver remove the two mounting  
nuts from the top two corners of the control  
board. See Figure F.19.  
14. Replace the control board.  
13. Cut any necessary cable ties.  
FIGURE F.19 CONTROL BOARD MOUNTING SCREW LOCATION  
Mounting  
Nuts (3/8")  
15. Replace the two 3/8” mounting nuts at the top  
two corners of the control board.  
19. Replace the four screws from around the two  
welder output terminals on the front of the  
machine.  
16. Replace any previously removed cable ties.  
20. Replace the two case front mounting screws at  
the bottom of the front of the machine.  
17. Replace plugs #J3, #J4, #J5, #J6, #J7, #J8, #J9,  
#J10B, and #J10A previously removed.  
21. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
18. Replace the two screws and their washers from  
above and below the input power switch.  
22. Perform the Voltage and Current Calibration  
Procedure.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-55  
F-55  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DISPLAY BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call or 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the display board for maintenance  
or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Flathead Screwdriver  
Phillips Head Screwdriver  
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-56  
F-56  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DISPLAY BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.20. – DISPLAY BOARD LOCATION  
Display Board  
C
S
3
L
1
7
1
D
1
1
1
Mode Board  
1
0
-
L
1
1
1
0
7
-
2
or Advanced  
S
T
A
T
U
S
I
N
P
U
T
Process Board  
M
O
DE SELECT  
L1  
1
1
10-1  
A A  
M
PS  
V V  
OL  
TS  
A
C
C-STIC  
OUTPUT  
K
K
7018  
6010  
WELD TERMINALS  
CC  
-STIC  
TIG  
CV  
G
T
A
W
-W  
IRE  
CV  
-FLU  
X
HOT  
S
SELECT  
CO  
T
RED  
AR  
4
T
5
3
SELECT  
6
ARC  
2
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
C
ONTROL  
7
1
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
R
E
M
O
T
E
+2  
-6  
9
10  
+4  
-8  
+6  
+8  
-10  
SOFT  
+10  
CRISP  
P
O
W
E
R
O
N
PROCEDURE  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor  
Discharge Procedure detailed earlier in this  
section.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case  
wraparound cover.  
4. Locate the display board behind the front  
panel of the machine. See Figure F.20.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-57  
F-57  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DISPLAY BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.21. – CASE FRONT SCREW LOCATION  
AMPS  
OLTS  
V
CONTROL  
SELECT  
WELD TERMINALS  
REMOTE  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
SELECT ATTRIBUTE  
MEMORY BUTTON  
SELECT KNOB  
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE  
Flathead Screws  
Phillips Head  
Screws  
_
+
5/16" Screws  
5. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the two  
screws from the bottom of the front of the  
machine. See Figure F.21.  
8. The front of the machine may now gently be  
pulled forward to gain access to the display  
Board. Note: The front of the machine cannot  
be removed completely, only pulled forward a  
few inches.  
6. Using a flat head screwdriver remove the two  
screws and their washers from above and  
below the input power switch. See Figure  
F.21.  
9. The display board is now accessible to  
replace.  
7. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the  
four screws from around the two welder out-  
put terminals on the front of the machine. See  
Figure F.21.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-58  
F-58  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DISPLAY BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)  
10. Remove plug J37 from the display board. See the  
Wiring Diagram.  
\15. Replace the four phillips head screws removed  
from the front of the machine located around the  
two welder output terminals.  
11. Remove plug J3 originating from the control  
board located directly across from the display  
board. See the Wiring Diagram.  
16. Replace the two flat head screws and their wash-  
ers mounting the input power switch.  
12. Remove the display board. Note: Gentle prying  
from behind the board may be required.  
17. Using a 5/16” nut driver replace the two screws  
previously removed from the bottom front of the  
machine.  
13. Replace the display board.  
18. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
14. Replace plugs #J3 and #J37 previously removed.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-59  
F-59  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
MAIN SWITCH BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the main switch board for main-  
tenance or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Flathead Screwdriver  
7/16” mm Socket  
3/16” Allen Wrench  
3/8” Nut Driver  
This procedure takes approximately 35 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-60  
F-60  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
MAIN SWITCH BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.22. – MAIN SWITCH BOARD LEAD LOCATIONS  
207  
202  
J22  
- +  
- +  
209  
201  
204  
208  
205  
J21  
J20  
- +  
- +  
206  
203  
PROCEDURE  
1. Remove the input power to the V350-PRO.  
5. Using a 5/16” and 3/8” nut driver remove the  
input lead shield from the area at the bottom of  
the main switch board.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wrap-  
around cover.  
6. Using a 7/16” socket, remove leads 201, 202,  
203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 209 from the  
switch board. Note lead terminal locations and  
washer positions upon removal.  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
7. Locate and disconnect the three harness plugs  
associated with the main switch board. Plugs  
#J20, #J21, #J22. See Figure F.22.  
CAUTION  
Observe static precautions detailed in PC Board  
Troubleshooting Procedures at the beginning of  
this section. Failure to do so can result in perma-  
nent damage to equipment.  
8. Locate the eight capacitor terminals and  
remove the nuts using a 7/16” socket or nut  
driver. Note the position of the washers behind  
each nut for replacement.  
4. Locate the main switch board and all associat-  
ed plug and lead connections. See figure F.22.  
See Wiring Diagram.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-61  
F-61  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
MAIN SWITCH BOARD REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.23. – 3/16” ALLEN BOLT LOCATION  
- +  
- +  
3/16" ALLEN BOLTS  
- +  
- +  
9. Using a 3/16” allen wrench remove four allen  
bolts and washers as shown in Figure F.23.  
At this point, the board is ready for removal.  
Carefully remove the board from the 4 nylon  
mounting pins. Note: Depress the retaining  
pins on the sides of the nylon mounts to  
release the board. See Figure F.24.  
13. Replace the four allen bolts and washers  
previously removed.  
14. Replace the eight capacitor terminal nuts,  
washers, and necessary leads previously  
removed.  
15. Reconnect the three harness plugs previous-  
ly removed.  
10. Carefully maneuver the board out of the  
machine.  
16. Reconnect the nine leads (#201-#209) that  
were previously removed.  
11. Apply a thin coat of Penetrox A-13 to the  
IGBT heatsinks on the back of the new  
switch boards mating surfaces. Note: Keep  
compound away from the mounting holes.  
17. Pre-torque all screws to 25 inch lbs. before  
tightening to 44 inch lbs.  
12. Mount the new board on the nylon mount-  
ing pins.  
18. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
FIGURE F.24. – NYLON MOUNTING PIN  
DEPRESS  
LOCKING TAB ON  
MOUNTING PIN  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-62  
F-62  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-63  
F-63  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL  
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the mode board for maintenance  
or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Small Flathead Screwdriver  
Flathead Screwdriver  
Small Phillips Head Screwdriver  
Phillips Head Screwdriver  
9/16” Wrench  
This procedure takes approximately 40 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-64  
F-64  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL  
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.25. – MODE BOARD LOCATION  
Display Board  
C
S
7
1
D
1
1
L
1
11  
Mode Board  
or Advanced  
Process Board  
3
0
-
L
1
1
1
0
7
-
2
S
T
A
T
U
S
I
N
P
U
T
M
O
DE SELECT  
L1  
1
1
10-1  
A A  
M
PS  
V V  
OL  
TS  
A
C
C-STIC  
OUTPUT  
K
K
7018  
6010  
WELD TERMINALS  
CC-STIC  
TIG  
G
T
A
W
CV  
-W  
IRE  
CV  
-FLU  
X
HOT  
S
SELECT  
CO  
T
RED  
AR  
4
T
5
3
SELECT  
6
ARC  
2
WA  
C
R
N
ONTROL  
I
N
G
7
1
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
R
E
M
O
T
E
+2  
-6  
9
10  
+4  
-8  
+6  
+8  
-10  
SOFT  
+10  
CRISP  
P
O
W
E
R
O
N
PROCEDURE  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
Discharge Procedure detailed earlier in this  
section.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case  
wraparound cover.  
4. Locate the advanced process board behind  
the front panel of the machine. See Figure  
F.25.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-65  
F-65  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL  
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.26. – CASE FRONT SCREW REMOVAL  
AMPS  
OLTS  
V
CONTROL  
SELECT  
WELD TERMINALS  
REMOTE  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
SELECT ATTTRIBUTE  
MEMORY BBUTTON  
SELECTT KNOB  
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE  
Flathead Screws  
Phillips Head  
Screws  
_
+
5/16" Screws  
5. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the two screws  
from the bottom of the front of the machine.  
See Figure F.26.  
7. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the  
four screws from around the two welder output  
terminals on the front of the machine. See  
Figure F.26.  
6. Using a flat head screwdriver remove the two  
screws and their washers from above and  
below the input power switch. See Figure  
F.26..  
8. The front of the machine may now gently be  
pulled forward to gain access to the mode  
board. Note: The front of the machine cannot  
be removed completely, only pulled forward a  
few inches.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-66  
F-66  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL  
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.27.. – CASE FRONT  
AMPS  
OLTS  
V
CONTROL  
SELECT  
WELD TERMINALS  
REMOTE  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
5/16" Screws  
SELECT ATTRIBUTE  
MEMORY BUTTON  
SELECT KNOB  
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE  
Adjust Knob  
Select Knob  
_
+
9. Remove plug #J33 from the remote board. See  
the Wiring Diagram.  
14. Using a 9/16” wrench remove the nuts and their  
washers behind the two knobs previously  
removed.  
10. Open the cover of the weld mode display on  
the front of the machine.  
15. Perform the Remote Board Removal  
Procedure. (Start at step #10)  
11. Using a 5/16” nut driver, remove the three 5/16”  
screws as shown in Figure F.27.  
16. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the  
two phillips head mounting screws at the bot-  
tom of the Advanced Process board.  
12. Place both knobs in the six o’clock position.  
13. Using a small flathead screwdriver, loosen the  
screw in the “Select” knob and the “Adjust”  
knob. The knobs should slide off of their  
shafts. See Figure F.28.  
17. Remove the Advanced Process board.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-67  
F-67  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL  
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.28. – SCREW IN CAP  
Small Flathead  
Screwdriver  
18. Replace the Advanced Process board.  
25. Replace the four phillips head screws removed  
from the front of the machine located around  
the two welder output terminals.  
19. Replace the two phillips head screws at the  
bottom of the advanced process board.  
26. Replace the two flat head screws and their  
washers from around the input power switch.  
20. Perform the Remote Board Replacement  
Procedure.  
27. Using a 5/16” nut driver replace the two  
screws previously removed from the bottom  
front of the machine  
21. Replace the 9/16” nuts and their washers  
behind the “Adjust” and “Select” knobs.  
22. Using a small screwdriver replace the two  
knobs previously removed.  
28. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
23. Replace the three 5/16” screws previously  
removed from the front of the machine located  
around the Advanced Process board.  
24. Reconnect plug #J33 previously removed.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-68  
F-68  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-69  
F-69  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
REMOTE BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the status board for maintenance  
or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Flathead Screwdriver  
Phillips Head Screwdriver  
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-70  
F-70  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
REMOTE BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
PROCEDURE  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wrap-  
around cover.  
4. Locate the remote board behind the front panel of  
the machine. See Figure F.29.  
FIGURE F.29. – REMOTE BOARD LOCATION  
Remote Board  
Display Board  
C
S
7
1
D
1
1
L
1
1
Mode Board  
or Advanced  
Process Board  
1
3
0
-
L
1
1
1
0
7
-
2
S
T
A
T
U
S
I
N
P
U
T
M
O
D
E
SELECT  
L
1
1
1
1
0
-1  
A A  
M
PS  
V V  
OL  
TS  
A
C
C
C
OUTPUT  
-S  
-S  
T
IC  
IC  
K
WELD TERMINALS  
SELECT  
7
6
C
0
1
1
T
8
K
T
IG  
0
G
0
T
A
W
C
C
V
-W  
IR  
E
V
-F  
H
O
T
L
U
X
C
S
O
T
A
R
E
R
D
4
T
A
5
3
S
E
6
L
E
C
T
2
R
W
C
A
R
N
I
N
G
C
O
7
N
T
1
R
O
L
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
R
E
M
O
T
E
+2  
-6  
9
10  
+4  
-8  
+6  
+8  
-10  
SOFT  
+10  
CRISP  
P
O
W
E
R
O
N
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-71  
F-71  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
REMOTE BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
5. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the two screws  
from the bottom front of the machine. See Figure  
F.30.  
8. The front of the machine may now gently be pulled  
forward to gain access to the remote Board.  
Note: The front of the machine cannot be removed  
completely, only pulled forward a few inches.  
6. Using a flat head screwdriver remove the two  
screws and their washers from around the input  
power switch. See Figure F.30.  
9. The remote board is now accessible to replace.  
7. Using a phillips head screwdriver remove the four  
screws from around the two welder output termi-  
nals on the front of the machine. See Figure F.30.  
FIGURE F.30. – FRONT SCREW REMOVAL  
AMPS  
OLTS  
V
CONTROL  
WELD TERMINALS  
REMOTE  
LOCAL  
REMOTE  
ON  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
SELECT  
SELECT ATTTRIBUTE  
MEMORY BBUTTON  
SELECTT KNOB  
ADJUST ATTRIBUTE  
Flathead Screws  
Phillips Head  
_
Screws  
+
5/16" Screws  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-72  
F-72  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
REMOTE BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
10. Remove plug J37 from the display board. See  
Wiring Diagram.  
17. Replace plug J37 previously removed from the  
display board.  
11. Remove plugs J33, J333 and J331 from the  
remote board.  
18. Replace the four phillips head screws removed  
from the front of the machine located around the  
two welder output terminals.  
12. Using a flat head screwdriver, remove the two  
mounting screws and washers from the bottom of  
the remote board. See Figure F.31.  
19. Replace the two flat head screws and their wash-  
ers from around the input power switch.  
13. Remove the remote board.  
14. Replace the remote board.  
20. Using a 5/16” nut driver replace the two screws  
previously removed from the bottom front of the  
machine  
15. Replace the two flat head mounting screws and  
washers previously removed from the bottom of  
the remote board.  
21. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
16. Replace plugs J331, J333, J33 and previously  
removed from the remote board.  
FIGURE F.31. – REMOTE BOARD (PLUG LOCATION)  
J33  
Remote  
Board  
J333  
J331  
Flathead  
Mounting Screws  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-73  
F-73  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
SNUBBER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the snubber board for mainte-  
nance or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16” Nut Driver  
7/16 Socket or Nut Driver  
This procedure takes approximately 15 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-74  
F-74  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
SNUBBER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
PROCEDURE  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wrap-  
around cover.  
4. Locate the snubber board.. See Figure F.32.  
FIGURE F.32. – SNUBBER BOARD LOCATION  
Snubber  
Board  
LEFT SIDE  
5. Remove small lead #B1 from the board. See  
Figure F.33.  
7. Carefully remove the snubber board.  
8. Replace the snubber board.  
6. Remove the four bolts using a 7/16” socket. Two  
of these bolts have leads #30 and #10 connected  
to them. Note the position of all leads and associ-  
ated washers upon removal.  
9. Replace the bolts, leads, and washers previously  
removed. Torque bolt to 30-40 Inch Lbs.  
10. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
FIGURE F.33. – SNUBBER BOARD LEADS (CLOSE UP)  
Lead 30  
Lead B1  
Lead 20  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-75  
F-75  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
POWER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the power board for maintenance  
or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16” Nut Driver  
3/8” Nut Driver  
This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-76  
F-76  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
POWER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
FIGURE F.34. POWER BOARD LOCATION  
POWER BOARD  
LEFT SIDE  
PROCEDURE  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wrap-  
around cover.  
4. Locate the power board. See Figure F.34.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-77  
F-77  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
POWER BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
5. Locate the three plug connections. J41, J42 and  
J43. See figure F.35.  
9. Replace with new power board.  
10. Secure the new power board into its proper posi-  
tion with the three 3/8” nuts previously removed.  
6. Carefully remove the three plugs from the power  
board.  
11. Replace the three plugs previously removed.  
Plugs J41, J42 and J43.  
7. Remove the three nuts and at the corners of the  
board using a 3/8” nut driver. Board is ready for  
removal.  
12. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
8. Remove the power board.  
FIGURE F.35. – POWER BOARD LEAD LOCATION  
J43  
J42  
J41  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-78  
F-78  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-79  
F-79  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
INPUT RECTIFIER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the input rectifier for maintenance  
or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
3/16” Allen wrench  
5/16” Nut Driver  
Flathead Screwdriver  
Penetrox A-13 Heatsink Compound  
Silicon Sealant  
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-80  
F-80  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
INPUT RECTIFIER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
PROCEDURE  
6. Remove the six screws from the terminals using a  
flathead screwdriver. Carefully note the position of  
all leads and their positions upon removal. See  
Figure F.37.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case  
wraparound cover.  
7. Using a 3/16”in. allen wrench remove the two  
mounting screws and washers from the input  
bridge. See Figure F.37.  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
4. Locate the input rectifier. See figure F.36.  
8. Remove the input bridge.  
5. Carefully remove the silicon sealant insulating the  
six input rectifier terminals.  
FIGURE F.36. – INPUT RECTIFIER LOCATION  
INPUT  
RECTIFIER  
A AMPS  
V VOL  
TS  
A
CC  
CC  
T
OUTPUT  
-S  
-S  
T
IC  
IC  
K
WELD  
7
6
018  
T
T
K
ERM  
IN  
IG  
G
T
010  
A
ALS  
W
CV  
CV  
-WIR  
E
-F  
HOT  
S
LUX  
SELECT  
C
ORED  
T
AR  
4
T
5
3
SELECT  
6
ARC  
2
W
ARNING  
C
ONTROL  
7
1
-2  
0
8
-4  
0
+2  
REMOTE  
-6  
9
10  
+4  
-8  
+6  
+8  
-10  
SOFT  
+10  
CRISP  
POWER  
ON  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-81  
F-81  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
INPUT RECTIFIER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
9. Apply a thin coat of Penetrox A-13 heatsink com-  
pound to the point of contact between the input  
rectifier and the mounting surface.  
11. Reconnect the previously removed leads to their  
proper locations. Torque to 31 inch pounds.  
12. Cover the input rectifier and its six terminals with  
silicon sealant.  
10. Secure the new input bridge into its proper posi-  
tion with the two 3/16”in. allen mounting screws  
previously removed. Torque to 44 inch pounds.  
13. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
FIGURE F.37. – INPUT RECTIFIER (CLOSE-UP)  
Small Lead "H1"  
To Auxiliary Transformer  
3/16" ALLEN  
BOLTS  
C
B
#207  
#207A  
A
#209  
Small Lead "A"  
To Circuit Breaker  
FRONT  
REAR  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-82  
F-82  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-83  
F-83  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULES REMOVAL AND  
REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the output rectifier modules for  
maintenance or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
3/16” Allen wrench  
9/64” Allen wrench  
5/16” Nut Driver  
7/16” Wrench  
Flathead Screwdriver  
Penetrox A-13 Heatsink Compound  
Thin Knife/Screwdriver  
This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-84  
F-84  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULES  
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
PROCEDURE  
5. Before the output rectifier modules can be  
reached, the Snubber Board Removal  
Procedure must be performed.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wrap-  
around cover.  
6. After the snubber board is removed, remove the  
four leads connected to the modules using a 3/16”  
allen wrench. These leads are #X4, #X2, #20, #40.  
Note their positions for reassembly. See Figure  
F.39.  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
4. Locate the output diode modules located behind  
the snubber board. See figure F.38.  
7. Remove the copper plates from the tops of the  
modules.  
FIGURE F.38. – OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULE LEAD LOCATIONS  
Output Diode  
Modules  
Snubber  
Board  
LEFT SIDE  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-85  
F-85  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULES  
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
8. Under the copper plate previously removed, there  
is an allen bolt. Remove it using a 9/64” allen  
wrench. See Figure F.39.  
13. The screw threads may catch on the threads of  
the heat sink, so be sure to get the face of the  
screw into contact with the surface of the module  
(using just hand torque).  
9. Using a 7/16” socket remove the mounting bolts at  
the top and bottom of the modules. See Figure  
F.39.  
14. Using a 7/16” socket, tighten each mounting bolt  
to between 5 and 10 inch pounds.  
10. The output rectifier modules are ready for removal  
and/or replacement.  
15 Tighten the center allen screw to between 12 and  
18 inch pounds.  
11. Before replacing the diode module, apply a thin  
even coat of Penetrox A-13 heatsink compound  
to the bottom surface of the diode module. Note:  
Keep the compound away from the mounting  
holes.  
16. Tighten each mounting bolt again (30 to 40 inch  
pounds this time).  
15. Replace leads #X2, #X4, #20, #40 to their original  
terminals in their proper positions. Torque bolts to  
30-40 Inch Pounds.  
12. Press the module firmly against the sink while  
aligning the mounting holes. Insert each outer  
screw through a spring washer and then a plain  
washer and into the holes. Start threading all  
three screws into the heat sink (2 or 3 turns by  
hand).  
16. Perform the Snubber Board Replacement  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
17. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
FIGURE F.39. – OUTPUT RECTIFIER MODULE MOUNTING BOLT LOCATIONS  
Mounting  
Bolts  
40 20  
X4  
X2  
3/16" Allen  
Bolts  
9/64" Allen  
Bolts  
Mounting  
Bolts  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-86  
F-86  
NOTES  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-87  
F-87  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed by only Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician or  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
test/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for electrical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 1-800-833-9353 (WELD).  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing the current transducer for  
maintenance or replacement.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16” Nut Driver  
1/4” Nut Driver  
1/2” Nut driver  
3/8” Nut Driver  
Channel Locks  
Flathead Screwdriver  
Phillips Head Screwdriver  
Hammer  
Crescent Wrench  
Pliers  
This procedure takes approximately 45 minutes to perform.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-88  
F-88  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
4. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the four screws  
PROCEDURE  
from the bottom and right side of the rear assem-  
bly. See Figure F.40.  
1. Remove input power to the V350-PRO.  
2. Using a 5/16” nut driver remove the case wrap-  
around cover.  
3. Perform the Input Filter Capacitor Discharge  
Procedure detailed earlier in this section.  
FIGURE F.40. – CASE BACK SCREW LOCATIONS  
REAR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Plastic  
Nut  
5/16" Mounting Screws  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-89  
F-89  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
5. Label and remove the five leads connected to the  
reconnect panel. Pliers may be necessary.  
9. Using a hammer and a flathead screwdriver, firmly  
tap the metal nut from the bottom of one of its ribs.  
This tapping will loosen the nut. Note: Be sure to  
tap from the bottom so the nut loosens in a counter  
clockwise fashion if viewed from the front of the  
machine.  
6. Label and remove the two leads connected to the  
CB2 circuit breaker.  
7. Using a crescent wrench, remove the large plastic  
nut from around the input power line located at bot-  
tom of the rear assembly. See Figure F.41.  
10. Using a 3/8” nut driver label and remove leads  
#202, #203, #206, #207A from the reconnect  
switches. See Figure F.41.  
8. Locate the steel nut located directly on the other  
side of the rear assembly behind the plastic nut  
that was previously removed. See Figure F.41.  
FIGURE F.41. LEAD LOCATIONS  
#206  
#202  
#207A  
#203  
A AMPS  
V VOL  
TS  
A
OUTPUT  
LINCOLN  
WELD TERMINALS  
ELECTRIC  
SELECT  
WA  
INVER  
R
NING  
TEC V350-PR  
O
ON  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-90  
F-90  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
11. The back of the machine may now gently be  
pulled away to gain access to the current trans-  
ducer. Note: The rear of the machine cannot be  
removed completely.  
16. Using a 3/8” wrench, remove the three mounting  
screws from the output diode heatsink assembly.  
Take note placement of insulation for reassembly.  
See Figure F.42.  
12. Carefully swing the rear of the machine open to  
the left while facing the rear of the machine.  
17. Cut any necessary cable ties and carefully remove  
the heavy lead from the diode heatsink using a  
1/2” nut driver.  
13. Perform the Snubber Board Removal  
Procedure.  
18. Remove the output diode heatsink assembly  
through the rear of the machine.  
14. Remove leads #X2 and #20 from the output diode  
module.  
19. Remove plug #J90 from the current transducer.  
15. Remove leads #X4 and #40 from the other output  
diode module.  
20. Using a 3/8” nut driver, remove the two mounting  
nuts from the current transducer.  
FIGURE F.42– OUTPUT HEATSINK MOUNTING SCREW LOCATION  
3/8"  
MOUNTING  
BOLTS  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-91  
F-91  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
CURRENT TRANSDUCER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (continued)  
21. Replace the current transducer.  
30. Using a 3/8” wrench, replace leads #202, #203,  
#206, and #207A previously removed from the  
reconnect switches.  
22. Replace the two 3/8” mounting nuts previously  
removed.  
31. Tighten the metal nut previously removed from the  
inside of the rear wall on the back of the machine.  
Channel locks may be necessary.  
23. Reconnect plug #J90 to the current transducer.  
24. Replace any necessary cable ties previously cut.  
32. Replace the large plastic nut from around input  
power line located at the back of the machine.  
25. From the rear of the machine, replace the heavy  
flex lead to the bottom of the output diode  
heatsink assembly using a 1/2” wrench. Note:  
Don’t forget to include all washers.  
33. Replace the five leads to the reconnect panel in  
their proper locations.  
26. Replace the output diode heatsink assembly pre-  
viously removed using a 3/8” wrench.  
34. Replace the two CB2 circuit breaker leads previ-  
ously removed.  
Note: Be sure to place insulation in its original  
35. Using a 5/16” nut driver, replace the four screws  
at the bottom and right side of the rear assembly.  
location.  
27. Replace leads X2, #20, X4, # 40 previously  
removed from the two output diode modules.  
Torque to 30-40 inch lbs.  
36. Replace the case wraparound cover.  
37. Perform the Voltage and Current Calibration  
Procedure.  
28. Perform the Snubber Board Replacement  
Procedure.  
29. The rear of the machine may now be placed back  
into its original position.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-92  
F-92  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
RETEST AFTER REPAIR  
Retest a machine:  
If it is rejected under test for any reason that requires you to remove any part which could affect the  
machine’s electrical characteristics.  
If you repair or replace any electrical components:  
Press and hold the MODE SELECT button (or the MEMORY button if an advanced process panel is  
installed) while applying power to the machine. Rotate the output control knob until the display reads  
SPIdIAG. Release the MODE SELECT button.  
Expected Results  
Lft.display Rt.display  
Test  
Steps  
Required Action  
1
oCP  
HI  
Adjust the output control potentiometer to its highest  
setting (completely clockwise).  
2
Adjust the output control potentiometer to its lowest  
setting (completely counterclockwise).  
oCP  
Lo  
NOTE: If a standard Mode Select Panel is not installed in the machine, skip steps 3-12  
3
4
5
6
7
Adjust the hot start potentiometer to its highest setting.  
Adjust the hot start potentiometer to its lowest setting.  
Adjust the arc control potentiometer to its highest setting.  
Adjust the arc control potentiometer to its lowest setting.  
All weld mode indicator LEDs should be off. Press the  
weld mode select push button to select the first weld  
mode. Only the top weld mode indicator LED should be  
on, all others should be off.  
HSP  
HSP  
ACP  
ACP  
NodE  
HI  
Lo  
HI  
Lo  
1
8
9
Press the weld mode select push button again to select  
the second weld mode. Only the second weld mode  
indicator LED should be on, all others should be off.  
Press the weld mode select push button again to select  
the third weld mode. Only the third weld mode indicator  
LED should be on, all others should be off.  
Press the weld mode select push button again to select  
the fourth weld mode. Only the fourth weld mode indi-  
cator LED should be on, all others should be off.  
Press the weld mode select push button again to select  
the fifth weld mode. Only the bottom weld mode indica-  
tor LED should be on, all others should be off.  
NodE  
2
NodE  
NodE  
NodE  
3
4
5
10  
11  
12  
Press the weld mode select push button again and veri-  
fy that all weld mode indicator LEDs are off.  
NodE  
CLr  
The test will automatically advance to step 25  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-93  
F-93  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
RETEST AFTER REPAIR  
Expected Results  
Lft.display Rt.display  
Test  
Steps  
Required Action  
NOTE: If an Advanced Process Panel is not installed in the machine, skip steps 13-24  
=100  
13  
Turn the Advanced Process Panel left encoder clockwise  
until the value displayed on the Advanced Process Panel  
lower left display equals 100. Note that this should require  
exactly one revolution of the encoder knob.  
LEnc  
Turn the Advanced Process Panel left encoder counter-  
clockwise until the value displayed on the Advanced  
Process Panel lower left display equals zero. Note that  
this should require exactly one revolution of the encoder  
knob.  
14  
LEnc  
=0  
Turn the Advanced Process Panel right encoder clockwise  
until the value displayed on the Advanced Process Panel  
lower left display equals 100. Note that this should require  
exactly one revolution of the encoder knob.  
=100  
=0  
rEnc  
rEnc  
15  
16  
Turn the Advanced Process Panel right encoder counter-  
clockwise until the value displayed on the Advanced  
Process Panel lower left display equals zero. Note that  
this should require exactly one revolution of the encoder  
knob.  
oFF  
EorY  
17  
Press and hold the Advanced Process Panel Memory but-  
ton until the right display changes to on.  
18  
19  
20  
Release the Advanced Process Panel Memory button.  
Press and hold the Advanced Process Panel Select button.  
Release the Advanced Process Panel Select button.  
EorY  
rSEL  
rSEL  
on  
oFF  
on  
1
Verify that the Advanced Process Panel upper left display  
contains the following pattern and that the brightness of  
the characters is uniform:  
21  
dISP  
“0123456789ABCDEF”  
Press and release the Advanced Process Panel Memory  
button to advance to the next step.  
22  
Verify that the Advanced Process Panel lower left display  
contains the following pattern and that the brightness of  
the characters is uniform:  
dISP  
2
“0123456789ABCDEF”  
Press and release the Advanced Process Panel Memory  
button to advance to the next step.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-94  
F-94  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
RETEST AFTER REPAIR  
Expected Results  
Lft.display Rt.display  
Test  
Steps  
Required Action  
23  
dISP  
3
Verify that the Advanced Process Panel upper right dis-  
play contains the following pattern and that the bright-  
ness of the characters is uniform:  
“0123456789ABCDEF”  
Press and release the Advanced Process Panel  
Memory button to advance to the next step.  
dISP  
4
Verify that the Advanced Process Panel lower right dis-  
play contains the following pattern and that the bright-  
ness of the characters is uniform:  
24  
“0123456789ABCDEF”  
Press and release the Advanced Process Panel  
Memory button to advance to the next step.  
SudS  
SudS  
The weld terminals “ON” and “REMOTE” LEDs should  
both be off. Press the weld terminals push button to  
select weld terminals (studs) “ON” and verify that the  
weld terminals “ON” LED turns on.  
on  
rE  
25  
26  
Press the weld terminals push button again to select  
weld terminals “REMOTE” and verify that the weld ter-  
minals “ON” LED turns off and that the weld terminals  
“REMOTE” LED turns on.  
27  
28  
Press the weld terminals push button again and verify  
that both of the weld terminals LEDs are off.  
SudS  
LorE  
cLr  
The “LOCAL” and “REMOTE” workpoint source LEDs  
should both be off. Press the workpoint source push  
button to select “LOCAL” and verify that the workpoint  
source “LOCAL” LED turns on and that the “REMOTE”  
workpoint source LED remains off.  
LocL  
LorE  
29  
Press the workpoint source pushbutton again to select  
workpoint source “REMOTE” and verify that the work-  
point source “LOCAL” LED turns off and the workpoint  
source “REMOTE” workpoint source LED turns on.  
rE  
LorE  
dcon  
cLr  
Press the workpoint source pushbutton again and verify  
that both workpoint source LEDs are off.  
30  
31  
This will only appear if a potentiometer is already con-  
nected to the 6-pin amphenol connector on the front of  
the machine. If this message appears, disconnect the  
potentiometer from the 6-pin amphenol connector.  
6-PIn roCP  
con  
32  
6-PIn roCP  
Connect a remote output control potentiometer to the 6-  
pin amphenol connector on the front of the machine.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-95  
F-95  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
RETEST AFTER REPAIR  
Expected Results  
Lft.display Rt.display  
Test  
Steps  
Required Action  
6-PIn roCP  
HI  
33  
34  
35  
Adjust the remote output control potentiometer connect-  
ed to the 6-pin amphenol connector to its highest set-  
ting.  
Lo  
6-PIn roCP  
6-PIn rIgr  
Adjust the remote output control potentiometer connect-  
ed to the 6-pin amphenol connector to its lowest set-  
ting.  
This will only appear if a trigger switch is already con-  
nected to the 6-pin amphenol connector on the front of  
the machine and the trigger switch is presently on.  
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 6-pin amphenol  
connector off.  
oFF  
36  
6-PIn Rigr  
6-PIn rLgr  
dcon  
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 6-pin amphenol  
connector on.  
on  
oFF  
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 6-pin amphenol  
connector off.  
37  
38  
This will only appear if a potentiometer is still connect-  
ed to the 6-pin amphenol connector. If this message  
appears, disconnect the potentiometer from the 6-pin  
amphenol connector.  
6-PIn roCP  
14-PIn roCP  
This will only appear if a potentiometer is already con-  
nected to the 14-pin amphenol connector. If this mes-  
sage appears, disconnect the potentiometer from the  
14-pin amphenol connector.  
39  
dcon  
con  
Connect a remote output control potentiometer to the  
14-pin amphenol connector.  
14-PIn roCP  
40  
41  
Adjust the remote output control potentiometer connect- 14-PIn roCP  
ed to the 14-pin amphenol connector to its highest set-  
ting.  
HI  
42  
43  
14-PIn roCP  
Adjust the remote output control potentiometer connect-  
ed to the 14-pin amphenol connector to its lowest set-  
ting.  
Lo  
14-PIn rIgr  
This will only appear if a trigger switch is already con-  
nected to the 14-pin amphenol connector and the trig-  
ger switch is presently on. Turn the trigger switch con-  
nected to the 14-pin amphenol connector off.  
oFF  
44  
45  
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 14-pin amphe- 14-PIn rIgr  
nol connector on.  
on  
Turn the trigger switch connected to the 14-pin amphe-  
oFF  
14-PIn rIgr  
nol connector off.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-96  
F-96  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR  
RETEST AFTER REPAIR  
Expected Results  
Lft.display Rt.display  
Test  
Steps  
Required Action  
14-pIn roCP  
46  
dcon  
This will only appear if a potentiometer is still connect-  
ed to the 14-pin amphenol connector. If this message  
appears, disconnect the potentiometer from the 14-pin  
amphenol connector.  
47  
Test steps 21-24 verify the functionality of the gas sole-  
noid. If an oscilloscope is available, verify that the cur-  
rent flowing through the gas solenoid is zero before the  
solenoid is energized, increases to approximately  
700mA (pull in current), remains at 700 mA for approxi-  
mately 150 msec, and decreases to approximately  
200mA (hold current). Press the local/remote pushbut-  
ton to turn the gas solenoid on.  
GAS  
On  
< - 150msec - >  
700mA  
200mA  
+------------------------+  
+-----....------+  
+-------------  
0mA- - - - +  
Or, the signal can be verified by measuring 12.3 VDC  
+/- .5V from lead 553A to 554A (Lead 553A should be  
positive)  
48  
Press the local/remote pushbutton again to turn the gas  
solenoid off.  
GAS  
OFF  
After completing all of the above tests, the following will appear on the display.  
Verify this message appears for approximately 3 sec-  
onds  
DIAg  
PASS  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-1  
G-1  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
-ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS SECTION-  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION G  
WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2  
MACHINE SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3  
CONTROL PC BOARD SCHEMATIC #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4  
CONTROL PC BOARD SCHEMATIC #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5  
CONTROL PC BOARD SCHEMATIC #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6  
CONTROL PC BOARD SCHEMATIC #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7  
CONTROL PC BOARD ASSEMBLY (L11088-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *  
POWER SUPPLY PC BOARD SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8  
POWER SUPPLY PC BOARD ASSEMBLY (G3632-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *  
SWITCH PC BOARD SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9  
SWITCH PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10  
DISPLAY PC BOARD SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11  
DISPLAY PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12  
LED SELECT PC BOARD SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-13  
LED SELECT PC BOARD ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14  
LED POTENTIOMETER PC BOARD SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15  
LED POTENTIOMETER PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-16  
SPI REMOTE PC BOARD SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-17  
SPI REMOTE PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-18  
SNUBBER PC BOARD SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-19  
SNUBBER PC BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-20  
* NOTE: Many PC Board Assemblies are now totally encapsulated and are therefore considered to be unservice-  
able. The Assembly numbers are provided on this page but the actual drawings are no longer included.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-2  
G-2  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
WIRING DIAGRAM - INVERTEC V350-PRO  
WIRING DIAGRAM INVERTEC V350  
RIGHT SIDE OF MACHINE  
}
INPUT  
PER  
N.A.  
+ C1,C3  
3200/300  
206  
203  
208  
SWITCH  
J20  
1
NOTE:  
IF ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL IS NOT INSTALLED  
SPI FLEX CIRCUIT IS PLUGGED INTO J33.  
607  
205  
615  
716  
715  
611  
612  
609  
602  
5
6
7
8
276  
5
4
10  
9
16  
3316  
3315  
3314  
3313  
8
7
6
5
4
3
1010  
1020  
2
3
4
275  
277  
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
209  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
610  
1002  
1001  
1020  
J37  
605  
608  
1010  
3
2
1
8
J21  
3305  
3304  
3303  
616  
7
1
2
1
2
3
6
5
4
1001  
1002  
903  
N.D.  
J9  
6
3312  
2
DISPLAY  
J22  
1
901  
804  
1
201  
207  
2
4
204  
J33  
502  
505  
J61  
J10A J10B  
2
1
3
201  
3301  
4
3
8
7
6
5
J60A  
5
J60B  
1
3200/300  
J333  
3313  
3316  
202  
J8  
205  
2
WELD  
TERMINA  
LS  
4
3
2
1
3304  
3312  
3315  
3303  
3
3314  
3305  
+
R5  
2
16  
802  
806  
801  
3216  
3215  
8
7
6
5
4
3
4
5
C2,C4  
3207  
Pin 3 lead 31B or 31C  
Pin 2 lead 32A or 532A  
W
10K/2  
OUTPUT  
CONTROL  
1
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
B
3206  
16  
15  
3205  
J52  
All  
Other  
Models  
6
2
716  
715  
3213  
3212  
3211  
J7  
277  
275  
3204  
3203  
276  
PRIMARY  
RECONNECT  
X2  
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
3202  
20  
3
FAN  
OR  
204  
7
FAN  
2
1
5
14  
1
11  
7
16  
3201  
4A  
J332  
J331  
SPI FLEX CIRCUIT  
L1  
REACTOR  
J52  
(Construction)  
R
X3  
30  
208  
X1  
COM2A  
E
M
O
T
203  
FAN  
6
5
4
3
2
1
12  
11  
10  
9
207A  
J1  
30  
4
2
CHOKE  
75  
77  
76  
x x x x x x x  
608  
616  
607  
615  
8
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
13  
505  
J6  
25  
10  
76A  
506  
503  
J34  
554  
553  
7
6
206  
A
E
8
202  
251  
J61  
MAIN  
TRANSFORMER  
7
MODE  
OR  
40  
5
4
3
2
1
605  
610  
ADVANCED  
PROCESS  
AUXILIARY  
TRANSFORMER  
N.E.  
( 380-575VAC POSITION )  
X4  
L2  
REACTOR  
254  
253  
554  
553  
14  
1
612  
10  
A
CB3  
INPUT  
BRIDGE  
209  
611  
A
A
3.5A  
SPI F  
LEX CIRCUIT  
602  
609  
+
_
A
N.C.  
TP3  
A
B
C
253  
D
E
F
TP1  
H4  
380-  
415V  
H2  
200-  
208V  
J2  
('CE' Model will not contain leads 31A or32)  
2
1
4
3
WIRE FEEDER REMOTE  
(REAR VIEW)  
502  
503  
251  
254  
J5  
3
4
1
2
207A  
207  
B
31  
31A  
31B  
41A  
or  
541A  
(construction)  
TP2  
J3  
J4  
CONTROL RECTIFIER  
6 PIN  
REMOTE  
_
550-  
575V  
440-  
460V  
220-  
230V  
~
12 11 10  
9
3
8
7
1
10  
5
9
4
8
3
7
6
C
41  
32  
32  
31A  
GND  
42  
(REAR VIEW )  
-
H6  
H5  
H3  
2
41A  
10A  
X2  
6
5
4
2
32A  
3.5A  
1
X4  
OUTPUT  
RECTIFIER  
H1  
A
L
J
66  
65  
CB1  
541  
CB2  
532  
4
2
K
41B  
B
D
I
2A  
D
41B  
2A  
66B  
21  
24  
H
C
N
F
SPI FLEX CIRCUIT  
E
A
~
M
G
GND  
F
C
75A  
75  
4A  
65B  
E
B
75A  
554  
54  
77A  
553  
76A  
77A  
77  
GAS  
SOLENOID  
20  
S
+
40  
76  
407 410  
412  
411 408  
N
U
B
B
E
R
401  
406  
405  
403  
65  
402  
66  
IN PARENTHESIS  
COLORS FOR  
"CE" MACHINES  
21  
SNB  
1
3
2
5
3
6
2
4
2
8
3
9
4
5
6
1
4
1
7
S1  
901A  
COLORCODE:  
10  
11 12  
_
10  
903A  
903B  
G(G/Y)  
R(B)  
B = BLACK  
G = GREEN  
R = RED  
W(N)  
B(U)  
J42  
J43  
J41  
W
V
U
POWER  
901B  
903  
R1  
W = WHITE  
U = BLUE  
N = BROWN  
TP4  
TP5  
A
B
C
Y = YELLOW  
J90  
2 3  
CURRENT  
TRANSDUCER  
FRONT VIEW OF MACHINE  
1
4
LEGEND  
901  
ALL MACHINES  
OPTION  
COMPONENT OUTLINE  
N.D. INPUT POWER LINE FILTER IS PRESENT ONLY  
ON "CE" MODELS.  
NOTES:  
N.A. 1. FOR MACHINES WITH RED, BLACK AND WHITE POWER CORDS  
LEFT SIDE OF MACHINE  
N.B. SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING  
THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT  
COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY HAVING A COMMON CODE NUMBER.  
FOR SINGLE PHASE INPUT: CONNECT GREEN LEAD TO GROUND PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE.  
CONNECT BLACK AND WHITE LEADS TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT.  
WRAP RED LEAD WITH TAPE TO PROVIDE 600V. INSULATION.  
FOR THREE PHASE INPUT: CONNECT GREEN LEAD TO GROUND PER NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE.  
CONNECT BLACK, RED & WHITE LEADS TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT.  
2. FOR MACHINES WITH BROWN, BLACK AND BLUE POWER CORDS  
FOR SINGLE PHASE INPUT: CONNECT GREEN/YELLOW LEAD TO GROUND PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE.  
CONNECT BLUE AND BROWN LEADS TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT.  
WRAP BLACK LEAD WITH TAPE TO PROVIDE 600V. INSULATION.  
FOR THREE PHASE INPUT: CONNECT GREEN/YELLOW GROUND PER NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE.  
CONNECT BLUE, BLACK & BROWN LEADS TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT.  
N.E. ON "CE" MODELS, MOV's ARE IN THE INPUT POWER  
LINE FILTER.  
J2,J5,J11,  
J22, J41,  
N.C. PLACE "A" LEAD ON APPROPRIATE CONNECTION FOR INPUT VOLTAGE.  
CONNECTION SHOWN IS FOR 550-575V OPERATION. (CE MODELS ONLY GO TO 440VAC.)  
J1,J6,J7, P52,  
J332, J333  
J31,J33,  
J34,J37  
J8,  
J20,J21  
J60  
J4  
J43, J331  
J10A,  
J10B  
1
J311, P55  
2
J9, J42, P53  
3
1
6
1
8
5
4
1
6
1
1
7
1
1
5
TOP CENTER  
PANEL  
J61  
8
9
16  
10  
3
4
5
12  
4
6
BASE  
CASE FRONT  
FAN SHROUD  
2
15  
1
PROTECTIVE BONDING CIRCUIT  
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
CONNECTORCAVITY NUMBERING SEQUENCE  
(VIEWED FROMCOMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD)  
1-25-2002  
G4082  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual. The wiring diagram specific to your code is pasted inside one of the enclosure panels of your machine.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-3  
G-3  
Enhanced Diagram  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - COMPLETE MACHINE  
+15  
SWITCH BOARD  
209  
609  
602  
J20-4  
J20-8  
MAIN  
INPUT  
RELAY  
CR1  
CONTROL BOARD  
+15V  
MAIN RELAY CONTROL  
VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY CONVERTER #1 (+)  
VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY CONVERTER #1 (-)  
PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE #1 (-)  
PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE #1 (+)  
J6-9  
J6-2  
J6-16  
J6-8  
J10A-1  
609  
602  
616  
608  
1001  
1002  
RECONNECT SWITCH  
CR1  
205  
206  
N.C.  
N.B.  
SNUBBER  
BOARD  
J10A-2  
4200 uF  
J21-6 616  
-
-
V/F CONVERTER # 1  
REACTOR  
J21-2  
J21-1  
J21-5  
608  
J8-1  
OUTPUT  
DIODES  
CURRENT FEEDBACK ( 4V=500A )  
+15V  
-15V  
CONTROL BOARD COMMON  
I OUT  
+15V  
-15V J90-2  
801  
801  
802  
804  
806  
J90-3  
J90-1  
INPUT SWITCH  
1001  
1002  
802  
804  
806  
J8-2  
J8-4  
J8-6  
4200 uF  
H1  
GND J90-4  
AC3  
AC2  
AC1  
POS  
NEG  
L1  
W
WHITE  
(BROWN)  
C
B
A
POSITIVE  
J60-A, J60-B  
203  
202  
J9-1  
J9-3  
(+) STUD VOLTAGE SENSE  
(-) STUD VOLTAGE SENSE  
208  
204  
901  
903  
+
TP3  
TP2  
901B  
INPUT  
LINES  
L2  
901A  
V
RED  
(BLACK)  
CURRENT  
TRANSDUCER  
C1/TP1  
.05uF  
600V  
320V  
160J  
R1  
5
1
TP1  
L3  
S1  
U
BLACK  
(BLUE)  
TP3  
150V  
80J  
21  
MAIN CHOKE  
x x x x x x x  
L3  
4200 uF  
J61  
G
GREEN  
(GREEN/YELLOW)  
903A  
-
A
J21-7  
605  
610  
NEGATIVE  
903B  
V/F CONVERTER # 2  
-
1
15  
3.5A CB3  
GND  
J21-3  
THERMOSTAT  
C2/TP2  
.05uF  
600V  
320V  
160J  
J21-4  
J21-8  
4200 uF  
REACTOR  
506  
Dashed lines represent  
copper bus connections.  
CE COLORS IN  
PARANTHESYS  
503  
-
J1,J6,J7, J332, J333, P52  
207  
B1  
8
1
506  
505  
SNB  
201  
Shown connected for  
200 - 240 Volt Input Voltage  
+15  
1010  
503  
502  
THERMOSTAT  
THERMOSTAT  
J5-3  
J5-2  
1020  
9
16  
SOFT  
START  
J31,J33,  
J34,J37  
(+)  
1
(-)  
5
505  
502  
AUXILIARY  
TRANSFORMER  
605  
610  
1010  
1020  
611  
612  
615  
607  
715  
716  
J6-5  
VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY CONVERTER #2 (+)  
VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY CONVERTER #2 (-)  
PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE #2 (-)  
PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE #2 (+)  
GND (a)  
SOFT START CONTROL  
PULSE TRANSFORMER GATE DRIVE  
J6-10  
J10B-1  
J10B-2  
J6-11  
J6-12  
J6-15  
J6-7  
J7-15  
6
10  
J2,J5,J11,  
J22,J41,  
J311,P55  
611  
FAN  
615  
607  
716  
612  
115 VAC  
715  
FAN  
FAN  
PULSE TRANSFORMER GATE DRIVE  
+ 15 (a)  
FAN CONTROL  
2
1
J7-16  
CONSTRUCTION MODELS DO NOT HAVE CB1, CB2  
4
3
OR REMOTE, LEAD 532 GOES TO J22 AND LEAD 541  
GOES TO THE CONTROL RECTIFIER IN THE  
CONSTRUCTION MODEL.  
J4-7  
J4-12  
J9,J42,P53  
407  
412  
407  
412  
J42-4  
J42-1  
POWERDOWN SIGNAL (HIGH=RUN)  
+15V (a)  
POWER DOWN SIGNAL  
+15 (a)  
31B  
POWER  
BOARD  
1
3
MACHINE  
J4-8  
+5 (a) J42-3  
408  
410  
411  
408  
410  
411  
+5V (a)  
GND (a)  
-15V (a)  
CONTROL  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
32A  
4
6
J4-10  
J4-11  
GND (a)  
-15 (a)  
J42-5  
J42-2  
J8,J20, J21  
4
1
54  
65B  
+5 SPI (b)  
+15 SPI (b)  
SPI GND (b)  
J4-3  
J4-2  
403  
403  
402  
+5V SPI (b)  
J43-3  
J43-6  
J43-12  
541  
6A  
532  
65  
J41-2  
+40 VDC  
J41-1  
SPI  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
402  
401  
406  
+15V SPI (b)  
CB1  
CB2  
5
8
J4, J43, J331  
3.5A  
41A  
66  
401  
406  
J4-1  
J4-6  
GND SPI (b)  
+5V RS232 (e)  
41  
+5 RS232 (e) J43-4  
GND (e) J43-9  
32  
6
32A  
1
RS232  
SUPPLY  
66B  
405  
405  
J4-5  
GND (e)  
41A  
7
12  
31B  
+20 (c) J43-8  
J10A,  
J10B  
CHOPPER  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
GND (c)  
+20 (d)  
J43-2  
J43-7  
J43-1  
1
GND (d)  
2
76A  
4
76  
24  
75A  
SPI CIRCUIT  
SPI CIRCUIT  
SPI CIRCUIT  
2 77 553  
77  
4A 75  
554  
41  
21  
76A  
(+)15 VOLT SPI  
(+)5 VOLT SPI  
/SS  
J3-1  
J3-2  
42  
CONNECTOR CAVITY NUMBERING SEQUENCE  
(VIEWED FROM COMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD)  
N.D.  
N.D.  
F
H
J3-3  
J3-4  
J3-5  
J3-6  
J3-7  
J3-8  
J3-9  
G
J333-16  
J333-15  
J333-14  
J333-13  
J333-12  
3316  
3315  
3314  
3313  
4
F
E
E
D
A
B
I
76  
N
CS1  
M
J
31  
32  
LEGEND  
77A  
K
CS2  
N.D.  
CS3  
L
ALL MACHINES  
OPTION  
+15V  
+15V  
+15V  
2
D
A
3312  
+15V  
+15V  
B
COMPONENT OUTLINE  
J60B-1  
J60A-1  
C
3313  
3303  
+15V  
LOCAL  
+15V  
J333-8  
J333-7  
J333-6  
J333-5  
J333-4  
J333-3  
J333-2  
J333-1  
75A  
276  
275  
277  
3305  
3304  
3303  
C
REMOTE  
MISO  
ON  
J60B-2  
J60B-3  
J60A-2  
J60A-3  
3316  
3314  
3315  
3312  
AMPS  
VOLTS  
R5  
10K/2W  
REMOTE  
+15V  
4A  
J2-1  
251  
253  
254  
SCK  
6 PIN REMOTE  
2B 2A  
75  
J2-3  
MOSI  
J60A-4  
J60B-4  
3305  
3304  
DISPLAY PANEL  
J3-10  
GROUND SPI  
J2-4  
276  
277 275  
WELD TERMINALS  
OUTPUT CONTROL  
WIRE FEEDER REMOTE  
NOTES :  
SPI  
CIRCUIT  
+10 Volts  
N.A. PC BOARD COMPONENTS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE  
ONLY. ALL COMPONENTS ARE NOT SHOWN.  
N.B. INPUT POWER LINE FILTER IS PRESENT ONLY  
ON "CE" MODELS.  
J332-16  
J332-15  
J332-14  
3216  
3215  
AMPHENOLS ARE VIEWED FROM FRONT OF MACHINE  
OR  
+15V  
LED 1  
J61-4  
J332-13  
J332-12  
J332-11  
J332-7  
J332-6  
J332-5  
J332-4  
J332-3  
J332-2  
J332-1  
3213  
3212  
3211  
3207  
3206  
3205  
3204  
3203  
3202  
3201  
3212  
3206  
3204  
+10V  
J61-3  
LED 2  
3207  
13  
J61-14  
J61-12  
N.C. ON "CE" MODELS, MOV's ARE IN THE INPUT POWER  
LINE FILTER.  
N.D.  
25  
14  
+15V  
+15V  
+15V  
+15V  
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
graphical representation  
of potentiometer connection  
J61-2  
LED 3  
554  
3202  
3201  
3216  
3215  
HOT  
START  
+10V  
+10V  
ARC  
CONTROL  
+15V  
N.D. THE SPI CIRCUIT PIN ASSIGNMENTS ARE SHOWN AT  
THE CONTROL PCB. THIS PIN ASSIGNMENT IS THE SAME  
FOR ALL THE SPI CONNECTORS.  
251  
GAS SOLENOID  
J61-1  
LED 4  
J61-5  
J61-13  
J61-15  
3213  
REMOTE BOARD  
MODE  
SWITCH  
254  
253  
J61-6  
LED 5  
3215  
3213  
553  
1
ADVANCED PROCESS PANEL  
MODE PANEL  
J61-7  
B
G4093  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-4  
G-4  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - DIGITAL CONTROL PC BOARD #1  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-5  
G-5  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - DIGITAL CONTROL PC BOARD #2  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-6  
G-6  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - DIGITAL CONTROL PC BOARD #3  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-7  
G-7  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - DIGITAL CONTROL PC BOARD #4  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-8  
G-8  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - POWER SUPPLY PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD  
+5V  
Machine Control Power Supply  
R50  
.13  
J42  
D18  
3
1
2
6A  
200V  
+
t
D4  
6A  
200V  
60V  
LED2  
10  
T1  
+5Volts, .750 Amp  
C43  
100  
16V  
C41  
100  
16V  
C39  
0.1  
50V  
T1  
C12  
33.2  
33.2  
10-55 VDC  
Operation  
.0015  
2000V  
332  
3
Vref  
1
R9  
10.0K  
10.0K  
10.0K  
11  
12  
D22  
10.0  
1.0A  
30V  
R60  
10.0  
D
S
+15Volts  
Q1  
21A  
200V  
G
R61  
10.0  
.750 Amp  
D24  
C13  
1
200V  
7
6
VCC  
OUT  
1
5
Vref  
1
J41  
8
4
5
2
J42  
D3  
1A  
600V  
VREF  
RT/CT  
GND  
VFB  
D19  
DZ8  
18V  
3W  
Vfb1  
OCI1  
2
X8  
1
DC Input (+)  
1
IN  
OUT  
CNY17-3  
COMP  
CS  
3A  
600V  
R10  
R5  
3
100K  
100K  
2
6
4
J41  
4
X5  
Vfb1  
ADJ  
9
+
t
7
D21  
1.0A  
30V  
C11  
22  
35V  
C14  
0.1  
50V  
C47  
1.0  
35V  
R55  
R52  
221K  
1.21K  
.33W  
T1  
1.82K  
T1  
OV1  
475  
Machine Control  
Shut Down  
4
6
C45  
150p  
100V  
C7  
0.1  
50V  
C6  
4.7  
35V  
R39  
R12  
5.62K  
Capacitor  
56.2K  
C8  
820p  
50V  
3W  
0.05  
C42  
R13  
C32  
2700p  
50V  
10p  
100V  
10.0K  
J41  
3
1
J41  
8
X1  
GND  
1
5
REF  
DC Input (-)  
TL431  
6
C44  
0.1  
50V  
C38  
4.7  
35V  
C40  
1.0  
35V  
-15Volts, .100Amp  
T1  
1.21K  
.33W  
5
J42  
J42  
8
ADJ  
J42  
2
IN  
OUT  
DZ1  
24V  
3W  
6
X9  
14  
D8  
1A  
600V  
gnd_mcps  
T2  
+5V  
Operation  
1
D25  
1.00K  
Undervoltage  
C31  
.0015  
2000V  
30-55 VDC  
Detect  
D2  
1A  
D23  
5
1
<30VDC  
600V  
1.0A  
30V  
OCI2  
CNY17-3  
D10  
X3  
D
Q2  
21A  
200V  
J42  
4
6
2
J43  
G
4
7
6
VCC  
OUT  
R32  
15.0  
6
S
IN  
OUT  
Vref  
2
8
4
5
2
VREF  
RT/CT  
GND  
VFB  
D9  
1A  
600V  
DZ2  
27V  
.5W  
C49  
.022  
R34  
221K  
DZ7  
18V  
3W  
1
COMP  
CS  
R31  
75K  
Vfb2  
ADJ  
3
3
C53  
.1  
R29  
X4  
C27  
C23  
1.0  
35V  
100K  
C25  
0.1  
50V  
OV2  
C24  
4.7  
35V  
C26  
1
200V  
1.21K  
.33W  
T2  
12  
150p  
100V  
D20  
1.0A  
30V  
C52  
150p  
DZ3  
27V  
.5W  
15Volts, .250Amps  
SPI  
gnd_mcps  
C2  
0.1  
50V  
C3  
4.7  
35V  
R38  
R28  
5.62K  
56.2K  
C4  
820p  
50V  
3W  
0.05  
Overvoltage  
Shutdown  
> 55 VDC  
C28  
10p  
100V  
249  
J43  
R40  
3
+
t
D16  
16A  
200V  
.13  
60V  
OV2  
OV1  
LED1  
2
+5Volts, 3 Amps  
SPI  
D14  
D17  
C37  
100  
16V  
C36  
100  
16V  
C35  
100  
16V  
C34  
0.1  
50V  
T2  
13  
150  
.33W  
150  
.33W  
150  
.33W  
D13  
Vref  
2
332  
DZ4  
3.3V  
3W  
C33  
4.7  
35V  
15  
J43  
D15  
X7  
5
IN  
OUT  
1A  
600V  
4
1
5
GND  
J43  
OCI3  
CNY17-3  
R17  
C5  
0.1  
50V  
C1  
4.7  
35V  
C30  
1.0  
35V  
+5Volts, .100 Amp  
CAN  
8
150  
.33W  
T2  
11  
+
t
D7  
1A  
2
6
4
.24  
Vfb2  
6
600V  
J43  
+20Volts  
.200 Amps  
Gate Drive  
475K  
R21  
10  
C21  
C17  
4.7  
35V  
C18  
4.7  
35V  
T2  
9
0.1  
2.49K  
.33W  
50V  
C46  
150p  
100V  
J43  
D12  
2
1.82K  
C16  
R22  
J43  
R24  
.24  
2700p  
50V  
10.0K  
7
J43  
D1  
+
t
D6  
1A  
X6  
4
1
IN  
OUT  
7
600V  
1A  
600V  
8
X2  
5
+20Volts  
.200 Amps  
Gate Drive  
GND  
REF  
TL431  
6
C22  
0.1  
50V  
C20  
4.7  
35V  
C19  
4.7  
35V  
T2  
8
C9  
0.1  
50V  
2.49K  
.33W  
C10  
4.7  
35V  
C29  
1.0  
35V  
+5Volts, .100 Amp  
RS232  
T2  
10  
150  
.33W  
J43  
11  
J43  
J43  
J43  
9
1
12  
FILENAME: G3631-2D2  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
LAST NO. USED  
R-  
C-  
D-  
CAPACITORS =  
MFD  
(
.022/50V  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)  
NOTES :  
N.A. SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON  
LABELS  
RESISTORS = Ohms (  
1/4W UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)  
(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)  
A
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE  
DIODES =  
1A, 400V  
WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY  
SUPPLY VOLTAGE NET  
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT  
COMMON CONNECTION  
NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING  
NUMBER.  
A
COMMON CODE  
FRAME CONNECTION  
EARTH GROUND CONNECTION  
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
"X" INFO.  
Chg. Sheet No.  
6-2-2000A  
DESIGN INFORMATION  
REFERENCE:  
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056  
EQUIPMENT TYPE:  
Digital Systems  
Schematic, Digital Power Supply  
ON  
ON  
2
3
PLACE DECIMALS IS .02  
PLACE DECIMALS IS .002  
DRAWN BY: JP\TK  
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF  
A
DEGREE  
10-27-2000E  
SUBJECT:  
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" ") TO AGREE  
ENGINEER:  
SUPERSEDING:  
t
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.  
DATE:11-30-98  
DRAWING No.:  
APPROVED:  
SCALE:NONE  
3631  
G
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-9  
G-9  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - SWITCH PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-10  
G-10  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-SWITCH  
ITEM  
REQ'D  
PART NO.  
S20500-4  
DESCRIPTION  
C1,C23  
C2,C24  
C3,C18  
C4,C21  
2
2
2
2
4
8
CAPACITOR,PPMF,.0047,1000V,BOX  
CAPACITOR,PPMF,.047,1600V,BOX,10%  
CAPACITOR,TAEL,27,35V,10%  
S20500-7  
S13490-93  
S20500-1  
S16668-6  
S16668-5  
CAPACITOR,PPMF,0.1,1000V,10%,BOX  
CAPACITOR,CEMO,4700p,50V,10%  
CAPACITOR,CEMO,.022, 50V,20%  
C5,C6,C15,C16  
C7,C12,C13,C14,C20,C27,C28  
C29  
C8,C9,C22  
3
2
2
2
2
4
9
S16668-9  
S13490-85  
T11577-57  
S16668-7  
S14293-18  
T12705-59  
T12199-1  
CAPACITOR,CEMO,150p, 100V,5%  
CAPACITOR,PCF,.027,50V,5%  
CAPACITOR,PEF,0.1,400V,10%  
CAPACITOR,CEMO,820p,50V,5%  
RELAY,DPST,12VDC,AG-CDO  
DIODE,AXLDS,3A,600V,UFR  
DIODE,AXLDS,1A,400V  
C10,C11  
C25,C26  
C31,C32  
CR1,CR2  
11.00 .04  
N.E., N.F.  
D1,D4,D16,D17  
D7,D8,D9,D12,D14,D18,D19  
D20,D21  
R2  
R1  
R126  
R127  
J21  
6
7
DZ1,DZ2,DZ3,DZ5,DZ6,DZ15  
DZ16,DZ18,DZ19,DZ23  
DZ4,DZ7,DZ17,DZ20  
DZ8  
10  
T12702-29  
ZENER DIODE, 1W,15V,5% 1N4744A  
1
2
1
2
R122  
DZ22  
R83  
DZ11  
.275  
.285  
R .045  
R123  
C22  
R37  
C9  
4
1
T12702-40  
T12702-19  
T12702-45  
T12702-4  
S24016-8  
S24016-4  
S15000-22  
S15000-29  
T12704-75  
T12704-73  
T14648-5  
ZENER DIODE, 1W,6.2V,5% 1N4735A  
ZENER DIODE, 1W,12V,5% 1N4742A  
ZENER DIODE, 1W,18V,5% 1N4746A  
ZENER DIODE, 1W,20V,5% 1N4747A  
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,RT-L,8-PIN  
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,RT-L,4-PIN  
OPTOCOUPLER,PHOTO-Q,70V,CNY17-3/VDE  
OPTOCOUPLER,TRIAC,DRV,RANDOM,600V  
TRANSISTOR,NMF,T247,4A,900V(SS)  
MOSFET,4-PIN DIP,1A,100V,RFD110(SS)  
RESISTOR,WW,5W,3.3K,5%,SQ  
X1  
X4  
OCI3  
MAX.  
.105  
CRIMP  
HEIGHT  
C3  
C18  
R65  
OCI2  
DZ9,DZ10,DZ12,DZ13  
DZ11,DZ22  
4
R135  
R72  
D21  
2
C32  
R39  
R38  
NON-COMPONENT  
SIDE  
J20,J21  
2
5
X2  
J22  
1
EYELET DETAIL  
R15  
OCI1,OCI2,OCI3  
OCI4  
3
B203  
B207  
R19  
C5  
N.L.  
C12  
R41  
R99  
1
N.L.  
N.C.  
R43  
D9  
R20  
R93  
C15  
Q1  
1
N.A.  
R78  
B218  
B211  
DZ9  
R97  
N.A. Q2,Q3,Q4,Q5  
R1,R2,R3,R4,R7,R8,R9,R10  
4
16  
B213  
B217  
R124,R125,R126,R127,R130  
R131,R132,R133  
R5,R6,R19,R26,R93,R105  
R109,R128,R129  
R11,R12,R30,R31,R142  
R13,R39,R43,R60,R81,R92  
R14,R107  
D1  
D16  
N.D.  
C31  
R35  
R60  
C1  
C23  
9
S19400-1001  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,1.00K,1%  
C13  
C20  
R5  
R128  
DZ23  
R129  
DZ1  
R6  
5
6
S19400-1503  
S19400-3321  
S19400-1652  
S19400-10R0  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,150K,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,3.32K,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,16.5K,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,10.0,1%  
C2  
C24  
X3  
2
R82  
R53  
R15,R20,R21,R22,R27,R28  
R97,R98,R99,R100,R101,R106  
R32,R33,R34,R48,R49,R50  
R51,R62,R63,R74,R75,R85  
R86,R87,R134,R135  
R35,R52,R73,R84  
R36,R37,R123  
R38,R40,R42,R45,R53,R59  
R66,R69,R70,R72,R80,R82  
R41,R67  
12  
B216  
B212  
R52  
MANUFACTURED AS:  
G3830-1DO  
20  
B205  
B204  
R22  
R69  
16  
S19400-1003  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,100K,1%  
R70  
20  
20  
R26  
C6  
DZ13  
3
D4  
D17  
R142  
R106  
R27  
N.B., N.G., N.J.  
(5 PLACES)  
R105  
C16  
B206  
B202  
4
3
S19400-6191  
S19400-2213  
S19400-1002  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,6.19K,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,221K,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,10.0K,1%  
1
R101  
IDENTIFICATION CODE  
12  
PART NO.  
R133  
R130  
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
S19400-4752  
T12300-79  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,47.5K ,1%  
RESISTOR,WW, 1W,1.0,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,33.2K,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,200,1%  
RESISTOR,WW,10W,100,5%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,8.25K,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,2.00K,1%  
TRIMMER,MT,1/2W,10K, 10%,LINEAR  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,100,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,357,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,150,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,475,1%  
RESISTOR,MF,1/4W,39.2,1%  
TRANSFORMER,PCB;  
R8  
R9  
R131  
R132  
R44,R68  
R46,R76  
S19400-3322  
S19400-2000  
S24376-3  
R7  
R10  
N.N.  
TRI1  
NOTES:  
R47,R64  
R11  
N.A. CAUTION: THIS DEVICE IS SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY  
STATIC ELECTRICITY. LINCOLN ELECTRIC TO SEE E2454  
BEFORE HANDLING.  
N.B. SNAP POWER TERMINALS INTO COMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD.  
N.C. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, THESE AREAS TO BE COVERED ON  
BOTH SIDES OF BOARD (WHERE POSSIBLE) WITH SEALANT PRIOR TO  
E NCAPSULATION.  
N.D. INJECT SEALANT ITEM 8 THROUGH THE PC BOARD HOLES (16 HOLES)  
TO SEAL MODULE LEADS. CAVITY BETWEEN BOARD AND MODULE TO BE  
COMPLETELY FILLED WITH ITEM 8 SEALANT MATERIAL AS PER  
APPROPRIATE MANUFACTURING WORK INSTRUCTIONS. COVER ALL  
MODULE LEADS THAT PROTRUDE FROM THE NON-MODULE SIDE OF THE  
BOARD WITH ITEM 8 SEALANT.  
N.E. FEMALE EYELET TO BE AGAINST THE NON-COMPONENT SIDE AS SHOWN  
EYELET MUST NOT SPIN AFTER CLINCHING.  
N.F. SOLDER EYELET SO THAT SOLDER COVERS ENTIRE EYELET  
AND ALL AROUND EYELET ON COPPER SIDE ONLY.  
NO ICICLES OR SOLDER BLOBS PERMITTED.  
N.G. AFTER SOLDERING, INSPECT POWER TERMINAL CONNECTIONS PER E1880.  
N.H. THIS AREA TO BE COVERED ON COMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD WITH SEALANT  
PRIOR TO ENCAPSULATION. MATERIAL MUST BE APPLIED FROM TOP TO  
COMPLETELY FILL TO UNDERSIDE OF DEVICE. THEN APPLY SEALANT AROUND  
BASE OF DEVICE.  
N.J. THIS AREA TO BE COVERED ON OPPOSITE COMPONENT SIDE OF BOARD WITH  
ITEM 8 PRIOR TO ENCAPSULATION. DO NOT COAT WITH ENCAPSULATION  
MATERIAL ON THE TOP SURFACES NOR THE THREADS.  
R55,R56,R57,R58  
R61,R77  
S19400-8251  
S19400-2001  
S16296-5  
J22  
B209  
R65,R120  
T1  
R138  
R140  
R139  
N.H.  
R78,R79  
R137  
OCI1  
CR2  
R83,R122,R141  
R137  
S19400-1000  
S19400-3570  
S19400-1500  
S19400-4750  
S19400-39R2  
S13000-46  
CR1  
C25  
R138  
J20  
C26  
R139  
R140  
0
T1  
TP1  
T13640-24  
MOV,175VRMS,120J,20MM  
0
9.00 .04  
TRI1  
S15161-27  
TRIAC,T220,8A,800V  
X1,X4  
S15128-10  
VOLTAGE REF,ADJ, PRECISION,431I  
OP-AMP,QUAD, HIGH-PERF,33074  
X2,X3  
S15128-18  
ITEM PART NO.  
DESCRIPTION  
QTY  
P.C. BOARD BLANK  
1
SEE DETAIL  
M16100-44  
S23006  
1
N.A.,N.M.,N.P.  
ELECTRONIC MODULE (A1, A2)  
TERMINAL (B211,B218,B204,B205,B209)  
CURRENT TRANSDUCER (T2, T3)  
POWER TERMINAL (B201, B208)  
EYELET-FEMALE  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
N.K.  
5
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS  
INDUCTANCE = HENRIES  
RESISTOR = OHMS  
M19612  
2
N.K. SEALANT HEIGHT BETWEEN MODULES NOT TO EXCEED .17” MAX.  
N.L. ITEM 5 MUST HAVE FULL CONTACT WITH ITEM 3 ON THE CONTACT SURFACE.  
N.M. THE TWO MODULES, ITEM 2 MUST BE MATCHED. THE LAST TWO DIGITS OF THEIR  
SORT CODES MUST BE IDENTICAL.  
N.N. SMALL PC BOARD HOLES TO BE FREE OF ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL FOR A  
CEN TERED .40 MINIMUM DIAMETER AND .45 MAXIMUM DIAMETER (4 HOLES). TO BE  
CENTERED WITHIN .06 (DO NOT GET ON MATING SURFACES). MASK PER  
APPROPRIATE MANUFACTURING WORK INSTRUCTIONS.  
S24866  
T9147-11  
T9147-15  
E2861  
2
8
2
EYELET-MALE  
8
N.M.  
SEALANT  
5.0oz  
SCHEMATIC REFERENCE L11487-1D0  
N.P. ELECTRONIC MODULES TO BE ASSEMBLED AND ENCAPSULATED PER E3875.  
MAKE PER E1911  
ENCAPSULATE WITH E1844, 3 COATS  
PC. BOARD BLANK REFERENCE INFORMATION  
BUY COMPLETE AS G3831-D (4 LAYER BOARD PER E3281)  
(MAKES 2 BOARDS PER PANEL, SEE ELECTRONIC FILE FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION)  
PANEL SIZE PER E1911  
TEST PER E3817-SW  
FOR PARTS ORDERS AND SUBSIDIARY ORDERS:  
INCLUDE (1) S25191PRINT AND (1) T12837-1.  
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056  
Chg. Sheet No.  
6-2-2000A  
"X" INFO.  
DESIGN INFORMATION  
REFERENCE:  
SUPERSEDING:  
EQUIPMENT TYPE:  
SUBJECT:  
INVERTER WELDERS  
SWITCH P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY  
ON  
ON  
2
3
PLACE DECIMALS IS .02  
PLACE DECIMALS IS .002  
DEGREE  
DRAWN BY: F.V./JB  
9-22-2000A  
10-27-2000F  
5-25-2001C  
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF  
A
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" ") TO AGREE  
ENGINEER:  
t
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.  
11-18-99  
DRAWING No.:  
APPROVED:  
SCALE:  
FULL  
DATE:  
3830-1  
G
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is pro-  
vided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the  
machine.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-11  
G-11  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - DISPLAY PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-12  
G-12  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-DISPLAY  
ITEM  
REQ'D  
PART NO.  
L11130-D  
L11166-1  
T15176-2  
E3539  
DESCRIPTION  
1
2
3
4
1
DISPLAY P.C. BOARD BLANK (REF ONLY)  
FLEX CIRCUIT  
V
1
4
LED, SPACER, 0,140 HIGH  
ELECTRICAL INSULATING COMPOUND  
.01 OZ.  
FOR ITEMS BELOW REFER TO ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DATABASE FOR COMPONENT  
SPECIFICATIONS  
C1  
1
8
S25024-7SMT  
S25020-3SMT  
CAPACITOR, SMD, TANTALUM, 47ME, 20V, 10%, S7343  
CAPACITOR, SMD, CERAMIC, 0.1ME, 50V, 10%, X7R, S0805  
C2, C3, C4, C5, C11, C12, C19,  
C20  
N.A.,N.D. DISP1, DISP2, DISP3, DISP4  
8
S17395-6  
LED, DISPLAY, 7-SEGMENT, CC, BRIGHT  
DISP5, DISP6, DISP7, DISP8  
J37  
1
4
3
2
6
1
5
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
S18248-10  
T13657-6  
T13657-12  
CONNECTOR, MOLEX, MINI, PCB, 10-PIN  
LED, T-1, RED, HLMP-K101  
N.A. LED1, LED2, LED3, LED4  
N.A. LED 5, LED6, LED7  
LED, T-1, 3/4, YELLOW, HIGH-INTENSITY  
R6, R16  
S25000-1501SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 1.50K, 1%, S0805  
S25000-1212SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 12.1K, 1%, S0805  
S25000-2670SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 267OHMS, 1%, S0805  
S25000-1001SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 1.00K, 1%, S0805  
S25000-10R0SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 10.0OHMS, 1%, S0805  
S25000-4751SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 4.75K, 1%, S0805  
S25000-4752SMT RESISTOR, SMD, METAL FILM, 1/10W, 47.5K, 1%, S0805  
R9, R10, R11, R12, R13, R14  
R20  
R21, R25, R26, R28, R29  
R22, R23  
R24  
R27  
N.B. X1  
S17900-8SMT  
S17900-26SMT  
S17900-28SMT  
S17900-10SMT  
S20496-1SMT  
IC, SMD, CMOS, INVERTER, SCHMITT, HEX, HC14A (SS)  
IC, CMOS, SMD, MUX, DAT, 8-INPUT, HC151 (SS)  
IC, SMD, CMOS, INVERTING BUFFER, 3-ST (SS)  
IC, SMD, CMOS, REGISTER, SHFT, S-PI/SO, 8-BIT (SS)  
IC, SMD, CMOS, DRIVER, DISPLAY, LED, CC, MCU  
1
N.B. X2  
N.B. X3  
N.A.,N.E.  
N.A.  
N.B. X4  
2.95  
X5, X6, X7  
1.75  
1.60  
1.45  
SPI DISPLAY  
L11130-3  
R6  
C20  
R21  
LED5  
X6  
N.A.  
LED  
1
R25  
X2  
C3  
X5 LED6  
LED7  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP3  
DISP4  
DISP5 DISP6  
LED3  
DISP7  
X4  
DISP8  
LED1  
LED2  
C1  
LED4  
R23  
X7  
2
3
R11  
R20  
.50  
R13  
R16  
C12  
NOTES:  
N.A. DO NOT COAT WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:  
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS  
INDUCTANCE = HENRIES  
RESISTANCE = OHMS  
R26  
X1  
R28  
5
4
R9  
C2  
J37  
C5  
R27  
R14  
R10  
N.C.  
0
N.B. CAUTION: THIS DEVICE IS SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY STATIC  
ELECTRICITY. SEE E2454 BEFORE HANDLING.  
GROUND SIDE  
N.A.  
0
5.65  
5.75  
3
N.C. USE ITEM 3 TO STAND LED1, LED2,LED3 AND LED4 FROM THE P.C. BOARD. THERE  
MUST NOT BE MORE THAN .020 GAP BETWEEN SPACER AND P.C. BOARD OR  
BETWEEN SPACER AND LED. ENCAPSULATE P.C.BOARD, SPACER AND LOWER HALF  
OF LED.  
5.90  
N.D. DISP 1 THRU DISP 8 MUST ALWAYS BE MATCHED BY VENDOR NAME.  
DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT VENDORS ON THE SAME BOARD ASSEMBLY.  
N.E. CONNECTOR MUST BE GREASED WITH ITEM 4 PRIOR TO ENCAPSULATION.  
2
BUY AS:  
ENCAPSULATE WITH HUMISEAL 1A27LU PER  
E1844 OR WITH EQUIVALENT AS APPROVED  
BY LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY. (2 COATS)  
IDENTIFICATION CODE  
PART NO.  
BUY PER E3867  
TEST PER E3856-D  
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056  
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS .02  
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS .002  
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF A DEGREE  
"X" INFO.  
XM5626  
XA  
Chg. Sheet No.  
6-2-2000A  
8-4-2000C  
DESIGN INFORMATION  
REFERENCE:  
EQUIPMENT TYPE:  
SUBJECT:  
MISCELLANEOUS  
SPI DISPLAY P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY  
DATE:5-11-2000DRAWING No.:  
DRAWN BY: JB/  
L11130-2  
ENGINEER:  
SUPERSEDING:  
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" ") TO AGREE  
t
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.  
APPROVED:  
SCALE:FULL  
11130-3  
L
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is pro-  
vided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the  
machine.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-13  
G-13  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - LED SELECT PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-14  
G-14  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-LED SELECT  
ITEM  
REQ'D PART NO  
DESCRIPTION  
P.C. BOARD BLANK INFORMATION:  
MAKE FROM S19399 (MAKES 63 BOARDS  
PER PANEL, SEE ELECTRONIC FILE FOR  
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)  
BLANK PART NUMBER  
1
2
1
1
SEE BLANK P.C. BOARD BLANK  
CI001498 E3165-.25-.75-.20  
FOR ITEMS BELOW REFER TO ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DATABASE FOR COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS  
M19875-B  
J60  
1
6
S19365-5  
CONNECTOR,PCB,WW,MALE,RT-L,15-PIN  
LED1,LED2,LED3,LED4,LED5,  
T13657-13 LED,T-1,3/4,RED,HIGH-INTENSITY, OVAL  
LED6  
R1,R2  
S1  
CATHODE  
(SQUARE)  
2
1
S19400-7500 RESISTOR, MF, 1/4W, 750, 1%  
T13381-16 SWITCH,PUSHBUTTON,SPST  
RESISTANCE = OHMS  
ANODE  
(ROUND)  
1
ENLARGED DETAIL  
(LED ORIENTATION)  
N.A.  
N.D.  
MANUFACTURE AS:  
M19875-1B0  
1.33  
M19875-1  
LED SELECT  
N.E.  
IDENTIFICATION CODE  
LED6 LED5 LED4  
S1  
J60  
PART NO.  
LED3 LED2 LED1  
ENCAPSULATE WITH E1844. (2 COATS)  
BRUSH COAT ACCEPTABLE  
2
N.B.  
0
0
2.55  
NOTES:  
N.A.  
N.C.  
N.A. DO NOT COAT WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.  
N.B. INSERT ITEM 2 BETWEEN ROWS OF LED'S. ITEM 2  
MUST BE FLUSH WITH LED BULB.  
N.C. ENCAPSULATE PC BOARD AND LOWER HALF OF LED.  
N.D. ENCAPSULATE AROUND BASE OF COMPONENT  
N.E. COAT EXTERNAL PINS WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.  
FOR PARTS ORDERS ONLY:  
TEST PER E3964-ST  
SCHEMATIC REFERENCE: S25259-1B0  
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056  
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS .02  
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS .002  
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF A DEGREE  
"X" INFO.  
Chg. Sheet No.  
DESIGN INFORMATION  
DRAWN BY:  
REFERENCE:  
EQUIPMENT TYPE:  
SUBJECT:  
INVERTER WELDERS  
1-25-2002  
F.V.  
M19874-1  
LED SELECT PC BD AS'BLY  
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" ") TO AGREE  
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.  
ENGINEER: Craig Hejl  
SUPERSEDING:  
t
APPROVED:  
SCALE:FUL  
DRAWING No.:  
DATE:  
3-21-2001  
19875-1  
M
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is pro-  
vided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the  
machine.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-15  
G-15  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC - LED POTENTIOMETER PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-16  
G-16  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-LED POTENTIOMETER  
ITEM  
REQ'D PART NO  
DESCRIPTION  
P.C. BOARD BLANK INFORMATION:  
MAKE FROM S19399 (MAKES 18 BOARDS  
PER PANEL, SEE ELECTRONIC FILE FOR  
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)  
BLANK PART NUMBER  
1
2
1
SEE BLANK P.C. BOARD BLANK  
10 T15176-1  
LED SPACER  
FOR ITEMS BELOW REFER TO ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DATABASE FOR COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS  
J61  
1
5
2
1
S19365-15 CONNECTOR,PCB,WW,MALE,RT-L,15-PIN  
T13657-11 LED,T-1,3/4,RED,HIGH-INTENSITY  
M19874-A  
LED1,LED2,LED3,LED4,LED5  
R1,R2  
S1  
S19366-1  
POT,ST,0.5W,10K,10%,LINEAR  
T13381-17 SWITCH,PUSHBUTTON,SPST,GREEN,W/BLACK  
RESISTANCE = OHMS  
N.B.  
N.C.  
N.D.  
N.C.  
1.90  
LED/POT  
M19874-1  
LED1  
LED2  
J61  
MANUFACTURE AS:  
M19874-1A2  
LED3  
S1  
.88  
LED4  
R2  
R1  
IDENTIFICATION CODE  
LED5  
2
PART NO.  
0
ENCAPSULATE WITH E1844. (2 COATS)  
BRUSH COAT ACCEPTABLE  
0
1.80  
5.35  
N.C.  
N.A.  
NOTES:  
N.A. DO NOT COAT WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.  
N.B. THERE MUST NOT BE MORE THAN A .010 GAP  
BETWEEN SPACER & LED, OR BETWEEN SPACER  
& P.C. BOARD. ENCAPSULATE P.C. BOARD,  
SPACERS & LOWER HALF OF LED. LEDS MUST BE  
PERPENDICULAR WITH P.C. BOARD.  
N.C. ENCAPSULATE AROUND BASE OF COMPONENT  
N.D. COAT EXTERNAL PINS WITH ENCAPSULATION MATERIAL.  
FOR PARTS ORDERS ONLY:  
TEST PER E3964-MS  
SCHEMATIC REFERENCE: S25258-1A1  
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056  
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS .02  
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS .002  
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF A DEGREE  
"X" INFO.  
Chg. Sheet No.  
DESIGN INFORMATION  
DRAWN BY:  
REFERENCE:  
SUPERSEDING:  
EQUIPMENT TYPE:  
SUBJECT:  
INVERTER WELDERS  
1-25-2002  
F.V.  
LED POT P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY  
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" ") TO AGREE  
ENGINEER: Craig Hejl  
t
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.  
APPROVED:  
SCALE:FULL  
DRAWING No.:  
DATE:  
3-9-2001  
19874-1  
M
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is pro-  
vided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the  
machine.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-17  
G-17  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC-SPI REMOTE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-18  
G-18  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-SPI REMOTE  
ITEM  
REQ'D PART No.  
DESCRIPTION  
R1,R2,R3,R4,R5,R6  
R7  
6
1
5
5
2
8
S25000-1212SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,12.1K,1%,S0805  
S25000-2670SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,267OHMS,1%,S0805  
S25004-2430SMT RESISTOR,SMD,1W,243OHMS,1%  
1
1
1
2
1
G4018-C  
M19436-3  
S8025-80  
L11166-1  
SPI REMOTE/UI PC BOARD BLANK  
POTTING TRAY  
2
V
R8,R9,R10,R11,R12  
R13,R14,R15,R16,R17  
R18,R19  
3
4
SELF TAPPING SCREW  
FLEX CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY  
EPOXY ENCAPSULATING RESIN  
ELECTRICAL INSULATING COMPOUND  
SOFTWARE CPLD (X3)  
SOFTWARE CPLD (X4)  
PROGRAM X2 to 250K Hz  
KEYING PLUG  
S18380-14  
THERMISTOR,PTC,500OHMS,28mA  
S25000-3320SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,332OHMS,1%,S0805  
S25000-4751SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,4.75K,1%,S0805  
5
4.00 fl oz E2527  
.108 fl oz E3539  
R20,R21,R25,R26,R27,R28  
R29,R30  
6
N.B. 7  
N.C. 8  
N.D. 9  
N.K. 10  
1
1
1
1
S25336-1  
R22,R23,R24,R36,R37,R45  
R46,R47,R48,R49  
R31,R32  
10 S25000-1002SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,10.0K,1%,S0805  
S25337-1  
2
1
2
S25000-2210SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,221OHMS,1%,S0805  
S25000-1000SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,100OHMS,1%,S0805  
S25008-1002SMT RESISTOR,SMD,PREC,MF,1/10W,10.0K,0.5%,S0805  
S24671  
R33  
FOR ITEMS BELOW, REFER TO ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DATABASE FOR COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS  
R34,R35  
C1,C2,C3,C4,C5,C6,C7,C8,C9  
44 S25020-3SMT  
CAPACITOR,SMD,CERAMIC,0.1MF,50V,10%,X7R,S0805  
R50,R51,R52,R53,R54,R55  
R56,R57,R58,R59,R60,R61  
R62,R63,R64,R65,R66,R67  
R71,R72  
12 S25008-4751SMT RESISTOR,SMD,PREC,MF,1/10W,4.75K,0.5%,S0805  
C10,C11,C12,C13,C14,C15  
C16,C17,C18,C19,C20,C21  
8
S25001-1211SMT RESISTOR,SMD,1.21K,1/4W,1206,1%,TR  
C22,C23,C24,C25,C26,C27  
C28,C29,C30,C31,C32,C33  
R68,R69,R70  
R74  
3
1
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
1
1
1
2
3
6
S25000-2671SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,2.67K,1%,S0805  
S25001-1001SMT RESISTOR,SMD,1K,1/4W,1206,1%,TR  
C34,C35,C36,C37,C48,C49  
C50,C54,C55,C56,C57  
C38,C39  
2
1
1
1
1
3
4
5
8
3
4
2
2
1
2
6
2
6
S25020-5SMT  
S13490-183  
CAPACITOR,SMD,CERAMIC,2700pF,50V,5%,X7R,S0805  
CAPACITOR,ALEL,120MF,50V,20%  
R75,R76,R77,R78  
R79,R80  
S25001-1000SMT RESISTOR,SMD,100OHMS,1/4W,1206,1%,TR  
S25000-2211SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,2.21K,1%,S0805  
S25001-1213SMT RESISTOR,SMD,121K,1/4W,1206,1%,TR  
C40  
C41  
S25020-17SMT  
S13490-179  
CAPACITOR,SMD,CERAMIC,0.27MF,50V,10%,X7R,S1812  
CAPACITOR,ALEL,1000,35V,20%  
R81,R82  
C42  
R83,R84,R85,R86  
R87,R88,R89,R90  
R91,R92  
S25000-3321SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,3.32K,1%,S0805  
C43  
S25024-10SMT  
S25024-2SMT  
S25024-3SMT  
S25020-2SMT  
S25049-4SMT  
S25040-1SMT  
S25040-2SMT  
S25040-5SMT  
S25040-4SMT  
S25049-2SMT  
S25044-1SMT  
S25044-3SMT  
S25045-1SMT  
CAPACITOR,SMD,TANTALUM,22MF,25V,10%,S7343  
CAPACITOR,SMD,TANTALUM,1.0MF,35V,10%,S3528  
CAPACITOR,SMD,TANTALUM,2.2MF,20V,10%,S3528  
CAPACITOR,SMD,CERAMIC,0.022MF,50V,10%,X7R,S0805  
DIODE,SMD,DUAL,200MA,30V,SCHOTTKY,SOT-23  
DIODE,SMD,1A,400V,FAST RECOVERY,DO-214BA  
DIODE,SMD,1A,400V,DO-214BA/AC  
S25010-3SMT  
RESISTOR,SMD,MF,1W,20.0K,1%,SURGE  
C44,C45,C46  
C47,C51,C52,C53  
C58,C59,C60,C61,C62  
D1,D2,D3,D4,D5,D6,D7,D8  
D9,D10,D11  
D12,D13,D14,D15  
D16,D17  
S25000-4752SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,47.5K,1%,S0805  
S25000-2001SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,2.00K,1%,S0805  
S25000-3741SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,3.74K,1%,S0805  
S25000-3011SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,3.01K,1%,S0805  
S25000-2672SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,26.7K,1%,S0805  
S25000-2002SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,20.0K,1%,S0805  
S25000-1001SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,1.00K,1%,S0805  
S25000-5622SMT RESISTOR,SMD,METAL FILM,1/10W,56.2K,1%,S0805  
R93,R94  
N.F.  
R95  
R96  
N.G.  
N.E.  
1
3
2
R97  
R98,R99  
DIODE,SMD,DUAL,0.200A,70V,UFR  
R100,R101,R102  
R103,R104,R105,R106,R107  
R108  
6.14  
D18,D19  
DIODE,SMD,DUAL,0.200A,70V,UFR  
D20  
DIODE,SMD,1A,30V,SMA,SCHOTTKY  
DZ1,DZ2  
ZENER DIODE,SMD,3W,5.1V,5%, SMB  
N.L.  
DZ3,DZ4,DZ5,DZ6,DZ7,DZ8  
DZ9,DZ10  
ZENER DIODE,SMD,3W,12V,5%, SMB  
N.A. X1  
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
S17900-8SMT  
S25070-11SMT  
S25070-3SMT  
S25070-10SMT  
M15105-7SMT  
S15128-18SMT  
S15018-11SMT  
S15128-10SMT  
S15018-21SMT  
S25068-14SMT  
M15102-4SMT  
IC,SMD,CMOS,INVERTER,SCHMITT,HEX,HC14A(SS)  
IC,SMD,CMOS,OSCILLATOR,DIVIDER,60MHZ,SOIC8,(SS)  
CPLD,PROGRAMMABLE,XC9536,44-PIN,VQFP(SS)  
IC,SMD,CMOS,CPLD,XC9572,PLCC44(SS)  
ZENER_DIODE,SMD,225mW,12V,5%,SOT-23  
N.A. X2  
N.A. X3  
N.A. X4  
N.A. X5  
FTP1,FTP2,FTP3,FTP4,FTP5  
FTP6  
TESTPT_FUNTION FUNCTIONAL TEST POINT  
REMOTE  
J33  
1
1
2
1
4
2
2
1
S18248-10  
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,10-PIN  
G4018-1  
IC,SMD,CMOS,CONVERTER,A/D,MPU,10-BIT(SS)  
IC,OP-AMP,SMT,QUAD,HIGH-PERF,33074D  
J331  
S24020-12  
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,12-PIN,TIN  
X6,X7,X8  
N.A. X9  
X10  
J332,J333  
S24020-16  
CONNECTOR,MOLEX,MINI,PCB,16-PIN,TIN  
IC,SMD,CMOS,SWITCH,ANALOG,QUAD,201(SS)  
IC,SMD,VOLTAGE REF,ADJ, PRECISION,431I,SOIC-8  
IC,SMD,CMOS,DRIVER,MOSFET,4451, SOIC-8(SS)  
IC,SMD,VOLTAGE REGULATOR,ADJ,FLYBACK,3A,TO-263  
IC,ARRAY,DRIVER,PERIPHERAL,NPN,DARLINGTON  
L1  
S25083-3SMT  
S25050-1SMT  
S25051-4SMT  
S25050-2SMT  
S25051-6SMT  
CHOKE,SMD,POWER,47UH,10%,1.25A,  
Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4  
TRANSISTOR,SMD,NPN,0.5A,40V,SOT-23,MMBT4401LT1  
TRANSISTOR,SMD,NMF,SOT-23,0.115A,60V,7002LT1(SS)  
TRANSISTOR,SMS,PNP,SOT23,0.5A, 40V,MMBT4403LT1  
TRANSISTOR,SMD,NMF,DPAK,TO-252,10A,100V(SS)  
N.A. X11  
X12  
N.A. Q5,Q6  
Q7,Q8  
N.A. Q9  
3.64  
X13  
P.C. BOARD BLANK REFERENCE INFORMATION  
BUY COMPLETE AS G4018-C (4 LAYER BOARD PER E3281)  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:  
CAPACITANCE = MFD/VOLTS  
INDUCTANCE = HENRIES  
RESISTANCE = OHMS  
N.K.  
N.H.  
N.E.  
N.E.  
4
NOTES:  
N.A.  
THIS DEVICE IS SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY STATIC ELECTRICITY. SEE E2454  
CAUTION:  
BEFORE HANDLING.  
N.B. PROGRAM X3 WITH ITEM 7.  
N.C. PROGRAM X4 WITH ITEM 8.  
N.D. PROGRAM X2 WITH ITEM 9.  
N.E. ALL CONNECTORS MUST BE GREASED WITH ITEM 6 PRIOR TO ENCAPSULATION.  
N.F. ATTACH ITEM 1 TO ITEM 2 WITH ITEM 3. TIGHTEN ITEM 3 TO .60 M .05 Nm (5.3 M .5 in-lbs.).  
N.G. PLACE BARCODED ASSEMBLY NUMBER IDENTIFICATION AND BARCODED SERIAL  
IDENTIFICATION IN AREA SHOWN.  
SCHEMATIC REFERENCE: G4017-1C0  
BUY AS:  
N.H. THESE COMPONENTS MUST BE COMPLETELY COVERED WITH ITEM 5.  
G
4
0
1
8
-
1
C
0
N.K PLACE ITEM 10 ON PIN 8 OF J332 AS SHOWN.  
N.L. BOARD TO BE POTTED WITH ITEM 4 LAYING ACROSS BOARD AS SHOWN.  
ONLY 0.4" OR LESS OF ITEM 4 TO BE COVERED WITH ITEM 5.  
PART NUMBER IDENTIFICATION CODE  
BUY PER E3867  
TEST PER E3964-RM  
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
"X" INFO.  
Chg. Sheet No.  
1-25-02  
DESIGN INFORMATION  
REFERENCE:  
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056  
EQUIPMENT TYPE:  
MISCELLANEOUS  
SPI REMOTE/UI P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY  
ON  
ON  
2
3
PLACE DECIMALS IS .02  
PLACE DECIMALS IS .002  
DEGREE  
DRAWN BY:  
F.V.  
L11346-1  
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF  
A
SUBJECT:  
Ed Furman  
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" ") TO AGREE  
ENGINEER:  
SUPERSEDING:  
t
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.  
DATE:3-27-2001  
DRAWING No.:  
APPROVED:  
SCALE:FULL  
4018-1  
G
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is pro-  
vided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the  
machine.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-19  
G-19  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
SCHEMATIC-SNUBBER PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD  
6-2-2000  
S24761  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-20  
G-20  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
PC BOARD ASSEMBLY-SNUBBER  
ITEM  
C1,C2,C3,C4  
R1,R3  
REQ'D  
PART NO.  
DESCRIPTION  
4
2
2
S20500-4 CAPACITOR,PPMF,.0047,1000V,BOX  
T14648-20  
T14648-25  
1
RESISTOR,WW,5W,150,5%,SQ  
RESISTOR,WW,5W,10,5%,SQ  
R2,R4  
N.A., N.B.  
+.04  
2.90  
3
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION  
QTY  
4
C3  
1
2
3
4
M19532-A  
T13157-16 TAB TERMINAL  
EYELET-FEMALE  
1
1
4
4
P.C. BOARD BLANK  
B O X C P 4  
B O X C P 4  
C1  
T9147-11  
T9147-15 EYELET-MALE  
R3  
R1  
B10  
1.92  
B1  
6
1
Q C  
.275  
.285  
NOTES:  
R .045  
N.A. FEMALE EYELET TO BE AGAINST THE COPPER SIDE AS SHOWN  
BOXCP4  
C4  
EYELET MUST NOT SPIN AFTER CLINCHING.  
C2  
MAX.  
B O X C P 4  
N.B. SOLDER EYELET SO THAT SOLDER COVERS ENTIRE EYELET  
AND ALL AROUND EYELET ON COPPER SIDE ONLY.  
NO ICICLES OR SOLDER BLOBS PERMITTED.  
2
.105  
CRIMP  
R2  
R4  
COPPER  
SIDE  
HEIGHT  
B20  
B30  
B40  
.55  
EYELET DETAIL  
MANUFACTURED AS:  
0
0
MAKE PER E1911  
ENCAPSULATE WITH E1844, 2 COATS  
TEST PER E3817-SN  
M19532-1A0  
+.04  
.60  
1.75  
2.90  
3.50  
IDENTIFICATION CODE  
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC COMPANY, CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
Chg. Sheet No.  
"X" INFO.  
XM5626  
XC-UF  
DESIGN INFORMATION  
REFERENCE:  
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE PER E2056  
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS .02  
EQUIPMENT TYPE:  
INVERTER WELDERS  
SNUBBER P.C. BOARD ASSEMBLY  
6-2-2000  
DRAWN BY:  
ENGINEER:  
APPROVED:  
F.V.  
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS .002  
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF A DEGREE  
SUBJECT:  
SUPERSEDING:  
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" ") TO AGREE  
t
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.  
10-6-99  
SCALE:  
NONE  
DRAWING No.:  
DATE:  
19532-1  
M
DO NOT SCALE THIS DRAWING  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is pro-  
vided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the  
machine.  
V350-PRO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SVM ERROR REPORTING FORM  
We need to know if there are errors in our manuals. We also value any suggestions as to  
additional tests or procedures that would make this SVM a better tool for you.  
If you discover new or different “Problems or Symptoms” that are not covered in the three col-  
umn troubleshooting chart, please share this information with us. Please include the  
machine’s code number and how the problem was resolved.  
Thank You,  
Technical Services Group  
Lincoln Electric Co.  
22801 ST. Clair Ave.  
Cleveland, Ohio 44117-1199  
FAX 216-481-2309  
SVM Number ___________________________  
Page Number if necessary__________________  
Your Company__________________________  
Your Name_____________________________  
Please give detailed description below:  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
SD287 01/99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

LeapFrog Handheld Game System 21155 User Manual
Lincoln Electric Welding System IM595 A User Manual
Lincoln Oven 1961 User Manual
Listen Technologies Network Card DCN WAP User Manual
Logitech Webcam Pro4000 User Manual
Magnavox CRT Television 27MT5005D 37 User Manual
Makita Grinder 9505BH User Manual
Marshall electronic Flat Panel Television V R44P DVI User Manual
Maxxsonics Car Speaker ATL1202 User Manual
McCulloch Lawn Mower MC175H42ST User Manual